Chevrolet 2001 Blazer Owners Manual Owner's

2015-10-23

: Chevrolet Chevrolet-2001-Chevrolet-Blazer-Owners-Manual-813560 chevrolet-2001-chevrolet-blazer-owners-manual-813560 chevrolet pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 448 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

2001 Chevy Blazer
Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
Section 2 Features and Controls
Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
- Comfort Controls
- Audio Systems
Section 4 Your Driving and the Road
Section 5 Problems on the Road
Section 6 Service and Appearance Care
Section 7 Maintenance Schedule
Section 8 Customer Assistance Information

Courtesy

Transportation

Every

2001 Blazer

under warranty is

backed with the

following

services:

1-800-CHEV-USA

(

For vehicles purchased in Canada,

call

1-800-268-6800

)

that provides in an emergency:

Free

lockout assistance

Free

dead-battery assistance

Free

out-of-fuel assistance

Free

flat-tire change

Emergency

towing

1-800-CHEV-USA

(

For vehicles purchased in Canada,

call

1-800-268-6800

)

2001 Chevrolet Blazer

Owner's Manual

Litho in U.S.A.

Part Number C2111 A First Edition © Copyright General Motors Corporation 2000

Table of Contents

Windows

Keys and Door Locks

Remote Keyless Entry System (If Equipped)

Endgate/Liftgate

Automatic Transmission (If Equipped)

Manual Transmission (If Equipped)

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)

Parking Brake

Tilt Wheel

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

Windshield Wipers

Cruise Control

Exterior and Interior Lamps

Mirrors

Storage Compartments

Luggage Carrier (If Equipped)

Accessory Power Outlets

OnStar® System (If Equipped)

Sunroof (If Equipped)

HomeLink® Transmitter (If Equipped)

Instrument Panel, Warning Lights and Gages

Seats and Seat Controls

Safety Belts Air Bag Systems

Restraint Systems for Children

Section

Seats and Restraint Systems

Features and Controls

Comfort Controls and Audio Systems

Your Driving and the Road

Table of Contents (cont'd)

Your Driving, the Road and Your Vehicle

Defensive Driving

Drunken Driving

Control of a Vehicle

Braking

Steering

Driving Tips for Various Road Conditions

Off-Road Driving

Recreational Vehicle Towing

Loading Your Vehicle

Towing a Trailer

Heating and Air Conditioning

Setting the Radio Clock

Radio/Cassette Player/CD Player

Radio Theft-Deterrent Feature

Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped)

Hazard Warning Flashers

Jump Starting

Towing Your Vehicle

Engine Overheating

Changing a Flat Tire

If You're Stuck

Problems on the Road

iii

Section

Table of Contents (cont'd)

Maintenance Schedule

Service and Appearance Care

Section

Scheduled Maintenance

Owner Checks and Services

Periodic Maintenance Inspections

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

Maintenance Records

Tires and Wheels

Appearance Care

Electrical System/Fuses and Circuit Breakers

Capacities and Specifications

Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts

Fuel

Checking Fluids and Lubricants

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

Brakes

Bulb Replacement

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement

Table of Contents (cont'd)

Customer Assistance Information

In the Index you will find an alphabetical listing of almost every subject in this manual.

You can use it to quickly find something you want to read.

Section

Customer Satisfaction Procedures

Customer Assistance Offices

Roadside Assistance and Courtesy Transportation

Warranty Information (See Warranty Manual)

Reporting Safety Defects on page 8-10

Service Publications

Index

Section

Please refer to the last page of this manual for your

Service Station Guide

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,

CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem and the

name BLAZER are registered trademarks of General

Motors Corporation.

This manual includes the latest information at the time

it was printed. We reserve the right to make changes

after that time without further notice. For vehicles first

sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors

of Canada Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division

whenever it appears in this manual.

Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be

there if you ever need it when you’re on the road.

If you sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it

so the new owner can use it.

We support voluntary

technician certification.

For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a

French Language Manual:

Aux propriétaires canadiens: Vous pouvez vous

procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en français chez

votre concessionaire ou au:

Helm, Incorporated

P.O. Box 07130

Detroit, MI 48207

vii

2-Door Utility 4-Door Utility

About Driving Your Vehicle

As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this

vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an accident.

Be sure to read the “on-pavement” and “off-road” driving

guidelines in this manual. (See “Your Driving, the Road

and Your Vehicle” and “Off-Road Driving with Your

Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle” in the Index.)

How to Use this Manual

Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning

to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If you

do this, it will help you learn about the features and

controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find

that pictures and words work together to explain

things quickly.

Safety Warnings and Symbols

You will find a number of safety cautions in this book.

We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you

about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore

the warning.

CAUTION:

These mean there is something that could hurt

you or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.

Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the

hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you or

others could be hurt.

viii

You will also find a circle

with a slash through it in

this book. This safety

symbol means “Don’t,”

“Don’t do this” or “Don’t

let this happen.”

Vehicle Damage Warnings

Also, in this book you will find these notices:

NOTICE:

These mean there is something that could

damage your vehicle.

In the notice area, we tell you about something that can

damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage would

not be covered by your warranty, and it could be costly.

But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid

the damage.

When you read other manuals, you might see

CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different

colors or in different words.

You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle.

They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

For example,

these symbols

are used on an

original battery:

CAUTION

POSSIBLE

INJURY

PROTECT

EYES BY

SHIELDING

CAUSTIC

BATTERY

ACID COULD

CAUSE

BURNS

AVOID

SPARKS OR

FLAMES

SPARK OR

FLAME

COULD

EXPLODE

BATTERY

These symbols

are important for

you and your

passengers

whenever your

vehicle is driven:

CHILD

RESTRAINT

TOP STRAP

ANCHOR

DOOR LOCK

UNLOCK

FASTEN

SEAT

BELTS

POWER

WINDOW

AIR BAG

These symbols

have to do with

your lamps:

MASTER

LIGHTING

SWITCH

TURN

SIGNALS

PARKING

LAMPS

HAZARD

WARNING

FLASHER

DAYTIME

RUNNING

LAMPS

FOG LAMPS

These symbols

are on some of

your controls:

WINDSHIELD

WIPER

WINDSHIELD

WASHER

WINDSHIELD

DEFROSTER

REAR

WINDOW

DEFOGGER

VENTILATING

FAN

These symbols

are used on

warning and

indicator lights:

ENGINE

COOLANT

TEMP

BATTERY

CHARGING

SYSTEM

BRAKE

COOLANT

ENGINE OIL

PRESSURE

ANTI-LOCK

BRAKES

Here are some

other symbols

you may see:

FUSE

LIGHTER

HORN

FUEL

Vehicle Symbols

These are some of the symbols you may find on your vehicle. Also see “Warning Lights and Gages” in the Index.

For

a More

Detailed Look at

What's Under the Hood

See Section 6

Service Station Guide

Oil Viscosity

Engine Oil

See Section 6

Engine Oil Dipstick

See Section 6

Fuel

Use unleaded only.

See Section 6

for octane ratings.

Cooling System

See Section 5

Hood Release

See Section 6

Windshield Washer

Fluid

See Section 6

Spare Tire Pressure

See Section 5 & 6

Battery

See Section 6

Tire Pressure

See Section 6

1- 1-1

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

Here you’ll find information about the seats in your vehicle and how to use your safety belts properly. You can also

learn about some things you should not do with air bags and safety belts.

1-2 Seats and Seat Controls

1-10 Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone

1-14 Here Are Questions Many People Ask About

Safety Belts -- and the Answers

1-15 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly

1-16 Driver Position

1-22 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy

1-23 Right Front Passenger Position

1-23 Air Bag System

1-29 Center Front Passenger Position

(4-Door Models with Front Bench Seat)

1-31 Rear Seat Passengers

1-34 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for

Children and Small Adults (4-Door Models)

1-37 Center Rear Passenger Position

(4-Door Models)

1-38 Children

1-42 Restraint Systems for Children

1-53 Older Children

1-56 Safety Belt Extender

1-56 Checking Your Restraint Systems

1-56 Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash

1-2

Seats and Seat Controls

This section tells you about the seats -- how to adjust

them, and fold them up and down.

Manual Front Seat

CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to

adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is

moving. The sudden movement could startle and

confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you

don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when

the vehicle is not moving. Move the lever located under the front of the manual

seat up to unlock it. Slide the seat to where you want it.

Then release the lever and try to move the seat with your

body to make sure the seat is locked into place.

1-3

Manual Lumbar Support (If Equipped)

If your vehicle has this

feature, there will be a knob

on the outboard side of the

driver’s and passenger’s

bucket seats.

Turn the knob counterclockwise to increase lumbar

support and clockwise to decrease lumbar support.

Power Seats (If Equipped)

If your vehicle has this feature, there will be a control on

the outboard side of your seat.

Horizontal Control: Raise or lower the front of the

seat by raising or lowering the forward edge of

the control.

Raise or lower the rear of the seat by raising or lowering

the rear edge of the control. Move the seat forward or

rearward by moving the whole control toward the

front or the rear of the vehicle.

1-4

Moving the whole control up or down raises or lowers

the whole seat.

Vertical Control: Move the reclining front seatback

forward or rearward by moving the control toward the

front or rear of the vehicle.

Power Lumbar Control (If Equipped)

If your vehicle has this

feature, it is located on the

outboard side of the seat(s).

Press and hold the front of the control until you have

the desired lumbar support. To decrease lumbar support,

press and hold the rear of the control.

Memory Seat (If Equipped)

If your vehicle has this

feature, the control located

on the outboard side of the

driver’s seat looks like this.

Use this memory function to save your seat cushion and

seatback settings by using the following procedure:

1. Adjust the driver’s seat to a safe and comfortable

driving position.

2. Press the SET button and then one of the two

numbered memory buttons. You will hear a chime

for each button pushed to confirm that your settings

have been placed in memory.

3. To program your keyless entry transmitter, if equipped,

press the UNLOCK button within five seconds of

programming the memory button. You will hear a

chime to confirm programming of the transmitter.

1-5

When your vehicle is in PARK (P) for an automatic

transmission or the parking brake is engaged for a

manual transmission, push and release the numbered

memory button you just stored. The seat will move to

the set position. You will hear one chime.

Pressing the UNLOCK button of a keyless entry

transmitter will adjust the seat to the corresponding

stored memory position. You will hear one chime.

Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to readjust the seat. The transmitter

need not be reprogrammed unless it needs to correspond

to the other numbered memory button.

To set the seat for a second driver, follow the previous

steps, but use the other numbered button and the other

keyless entry transmitter.

If there is a third driver, use the seat adjuster switch to

adjust the seat. Pressing any of the seat adjuster switches,

the SET button or pressing the desired memory button

twice will cause the seat to stop moving.

If you push the numbered button to adjust the seat

and start the vehicle while the seat is still adjusting,

adjustment will pause while the ignition is in START.

Adjustment will resume after the ignition is in RUN.

Heated Front Seats (If Equipped)

If your vehicle has this

feature, the controls are

located on the outboard

side of the seats.

This feature will quickly heat the lower cushion and

lower back of the driver’s and front passenger’s seats

for added comfort.

Press the lower part of the switch to turn the heater on

low. Press the upper part of the switch to turn the heater

on high. Put the switch in the center position to turn the

heater off.

The passenger’s safety belt must be engaged for the

heated seat feature to work on the passenger’s seat.

1-6

Reclining Front Seatbacks

To adjust a manual seatback, lift the lever on the

outboard side of the seat.

Release the lever to lock the seatback where you

want it. Pull up on the lever and the seat will go to

an upright position.

If your vehicle is equipped with the vertical power seat

control described earlier, it allows the seatback to

recline also.

But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle

is moving.

1-7

CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is

in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle

up, your safety belts can’t do their job when

you’re reclined like this.

The shoulder belt can’t do its job because it

won’t be against your body. Instead, it will be

in front of you. In a crash you could go into it,

receiving neck or other injuries.

The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash the

belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt

forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.

This could cause serious internal injuries.

For proper protection when the vehicle is in

motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit

well back in the seat and wear your safety

belt properly.

Head Restraints

Head restraints are fixed on some models and adjustable

on others. Slide an adjustable head restraint up or down

so that the top of the restraint is closest to the top of

your ears. This position reduces the chance of a neck

injury in a crash.

1-8

Seatback Latches

The front seatbacks fold

forward to let people get

into the back seat or to

access the storage area

behind the seat.

To fold a front seatback

forward, move the lever

located on the side of the

seat rearward and pull the

seatback forward.

To return the seatback to the upright position, push the

seatback all the way back until the latch catches. If the

seatback was reclined before being folded forward, it

will return to the reclined position.

CAUTION:

If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move forward

in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury

to the person sitting there. Always press rearward

on the seatback to be sure it is locked.

Easy Entry Seat (2-Door Models)

The right front seat of your vehicle makes it easy to get

in and out of the rear seat.

1. Tilt the right front seatback completely forward and

the whole seat will slide forward.

2. Move the seatback to its original position after

someone gets into the rear seat area. Then move

the seat rearward until it locks.

CAUTION:

If an easy entry right front seat isn’t locked, it

can move. In a sudden stop or crash, the person

sitting there could be injured. After you’ve used

it, be sure to push rearward on an easy entry seat

to be sure it is locked.

Tilt the seatback completely forward and slide the whole

seat forward again to get out.

1-9

Rear Seats

Your vehicle has a folding rear seat which lets you fold

the seatbacks down for more cargo space.

The rear seat release handles are located on the rear of

the seatbacks. Push back on the seatbacks as you pull

up on the handles. The head restraint will automatically

fold out of the way when the seatback is folded down.

To raise the seatbacks, just lift up the seatbacks and push

until they lock in the upright position. Push and pull on

the seatbacks to check that the latches have locked in

the upright position. If they haven’t, see your dealer

for service.

To return the head restraints to the upright position,

reach behind the seats and pull the head restraint up

until it locks into position.

On two-door models with an inside mounted spare tire,

the driver’s side rear seat head restraint must be lifted

and held upright as the seatback is raised. Otherwise,

the head restraint will hit the spare tire and prevent the

seatback from properly latching.

Push and pull on the head restraints to check that they

have locked in the upright position. If they haven’t,

see your dealer for service.

1-10

Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone

This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts

properly. It also tells you some things you should not do

with safety belts.

And it explains the air bag system.

CAUTION:

Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t wear

a safety belt properly. If you are in a crash and

you’re not wearing a safety belt, your injuries

can be much worse. You can hit things inside the

vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously

injured or killed. In the same crash, you might

not be if you are buckled up. Always fasten your

safety belt, and check that your passengers’ belts

are fastened properly too.

CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo

area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,

people riding in these areas are more likely to be

seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people

to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not

equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure

everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using

a safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has a light

that comes on as a reminder

to buckle up. See “Safety

Belt Reminder Light” in

the Index.

1-11

In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says to

wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.

You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have

a crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so

serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive.

But most crashes are in between. In many of them,

people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk

away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt

or killed.

After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles,

the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does

matter ... a lot!

Why Safety Belts Work

When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat on wheels.

1-12

Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider

doesn’t stop.

1-13

The person keeps going until stopped by something.

In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield ...

or the instrument panel ...

1-14

or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.

You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,

and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why

safety belts make such good sense.

Here Are Questions Many People Ask

About Safety Belts -- and the Answers

Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an

accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be -- whether you’re wearing a

safety belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety

belt, even if you’re upside down. And your chance

of being conscious during and after an accident,

so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater

if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have

to wear safety belts?

A: Air bags are in many vehicles today and will

be in most of them in the future. But they are

supplemental systems only; so they work with

safety belts -- not instead of them. Every air bag

system ever offered for sale has required the use of

safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has air

bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most

protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions,

but especially in side and other collisions.

1-15

Q: If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from

home, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an

accident -- even one that isn’t your fault -- you

and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good

driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond your

control, such as bad drivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)

of home. And the greatest number of serious

injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than

40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety Belts Properly

Adults

This part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to know about

safety belts and children. And there are different

rules for smaller children and babies. If a child

will be riding in your vehicle, see the part of this

manual called “Children.” Follow those rules for

everyone’s protection.

First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems

your vehicle has.

We’ll start with the driver position.

1-16

Driver Position

This part describes the driver’s restraint system.

Lap-Shoulder Belt

The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to

wear it properly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.

To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.

Don’t let it get twisted.

The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across

you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back

slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you

more slowly.

1-17

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.

If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt

Extender” at the end of this section.

Make sure the release button on the buckle is

positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the

safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle

end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on

the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies

force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely

to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt

would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause

serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should

go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts

of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or crash,

or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.

1-18

Q: What’s wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly

as much protection this way.

CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is

too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too

much, which could increase injury. The shoulder

belt should fit against your body.

1-19

Q: What’s wrong with this?

A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled

in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt

would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces

would be there, not at the pelvic bones. This could

cause serious internal injuries. Always buckle your

belt into the buckle nearest you.

1-20

Q: What’s wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should

be worn over the shoulder at all times.

CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wear the

shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your

body would move too far forward, which would

increase the chance of head and neck injury.

Also, the belt would apply too much force to the

ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.

You could also severely injure internal organs

like your liver or spleen.

1-21

Q: What’s wrong with this?

A: The belt is twisted across the body.

CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.

In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width

of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is

twisted, make it straight so it can work properly,

or ask your dealer to fix it.

1-22

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.

The belt should go back out of the way.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the

way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both

the belt and your vehicle.

Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy

Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant

women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be

seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and

the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below

the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.

1-23

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the

mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s

more likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash.

For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to

making safety belts effective is wearing them properly.

Right Front Passenger Position

To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety belt

properly, see “Driver Position” earlier in this section.

The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same

way as the driver’s safety belt -- except for one thing.

If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out

all the way, you will engage the child restraint locking

feature. If this happens, just let the belt go back all the

way and start again.

Air Bag System

This part explains the air bag system.

Your vehicle has air bags -- one air bag for the driver

and another air bag for the right front passenger.

Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of

injury from the force of an inflating air bag. But these

air bags must inflate very quickly to do their job and

comply with federal regulations.

Here are the most important things to know about the

air bag system:

CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if

you aren’t wearing your safety belt -- even if you

have air bags. Wearing your safety belt during

a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting

things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it.

Air bags are “supplemental restraints” to the

safety belts. All air bags are designed to work

with safety belts, but don’t replace them. Air

bags are designed to work only in moderate to

severe crashes where the front of your vehicle

hits something. They aren’t designed to inflate

at all in rollover, rear, side or low-speed frontal

crashes. And, for unrestrained occupants,

air bags may provide less protection in frontal

crashes than more forceful air bags have

provided in the past. Everyone in your vehicle

should wear a safety belt properly -- whether or

not there’s an air bag for that person.

1-24

CAUTION:

Air bags inflate with great force, faster than

the blink of an eye. If you’re too close to an

inflating air bag, as you would be if you were

leaning forward, it could seriously injure you.

Safety belts help keep you in position before and

during a crash. Always wear your safety belt,

even with air bags. The driver should sit as far

back as possible while still maintaining control

of the vehicle.

CAUTION:

Anyone who is up against, or very close to, any

air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured

or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder belts offer

the best protection for adults, but not for young

children and infants.

CAUTION: (Continued)

Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air

bag system is designed for them. Young children

and infants need the protection that a child

restraint system can provide. Always secure

children properly in your vehicle. To read how,

see the part of this manual called “Children.”

There is an air bag readiness

light on the instrument

panel, which shows the

air bag symbol.

The system checks the air bag electrical system for

malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical

problem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light” in the Index

for more information.

1-25

How the Air Bag System Works

Where are the air bags?

The driver’s air bag is in the middle of the steering wheel.

The right front passenger’s air bag is in the instrument

panel on the passenger’s side.

1-26

CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant and an

air bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it

might force the object into that person. The path of

an inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t put

anything between an occupant and an air bag, and

don’t attach or put anything on the steering wheel

hub or on or near any other air bag covering.

When should an air bag inflate?

An air bag is designed to inflate in a moderate to severe

frontal or near-frontal crash. The air bag will inflate

only if the impact speed is above the system’s designed

“threshold level.” If your vehicle goes straight into a

wall that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level is

about 9 to 16 mph (14 to 26 km/h).

The threshold level can vary, however, with specific

vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat above or

below this range. If your vehicle strikes something

that will move or deform, such as a parked car, the

threshold level will be higher. The air bag is not

designed to inflate in rollovers, side impacts or rear

impacts, because inflation would not help the occupant.

In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air

bag should have inflated simply because of the damage

to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.

Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact and

how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal or

near-frontal impacts.

The air bag system is designed to work properly under

a wide range of conditions, including off-road usage.

Observe safe driving speeds, especially on rough terrain.

As always, wear your safety belt. See “Off-Road

Driving” in the Index for more tips on off-road driving.

1-27

What makes an air bag inflate?

In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing

system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. The sensing

system triggers a release of gas from the inflator,

which inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag and

related hardware are all part of the air bag modules

inside the steering wheel and in the instrument panel

in front of the right front passenger.

How does an air bag restrain?

In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions,

even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or

the instrument panel. Air bags supplement the protection

provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force

of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper

body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But air

bags would not help you in many types of collisions,

including rollovers, rear impacts and side impacts,

primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward

those air bags. Air bags should never be regarded as

anything more than a supplement to safety belts,

and then only in moderate to severe frontal or

near-frontal collisions.

What will you see after an air bag inflates?

After an air bag inflates, it quickly deflates,

so quickly that some people may not even realize

the air bag inflated. Some components of the air bag

module -- the steering wheel hub for the driver’s

air bag, or the instrument panel for the right front

passenger’s bag -- will be hot for a short time.

The parts of the bag that come into contact with you

may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There will be

some smoke and dust coming from vents in the deflated

air bags. Air bag inflation doesn’t prevent the driver

from seeing or from being able to steer the vehicle,

nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle.

CAUTION:

When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the air.

This dust could cause breathing problems

for people with a history of asthma or other

breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the

vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so.

If you have breathing problems but can’t get out

of the vehicle after an air bag inflates, then get

fresh air by opening a window or door.

1-28

Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After they

inflate, you’ll need some new parts for your air bag

system. If you don’t get them, the air bag system

won’t be there to help protect you in another crash.

A new system will include air bag modules and

possibly other parts. The service manual for your

vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.

Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnostic module,

which records information about the air bag system.

The module records information about the readiness

of the system, when the system commands air bag

inflation and driver’s safety belt usage at deployment.

Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag

system. Improper service can mean that your air bag

system won’t work properly. See your dealer for service.

NOTICE:

If you damage the covering for the driver’s or the

right front passenger’s air bag, the bag may not

work properly. You may have to replace the air

bag module in the steering wheel or both the air

bag module and the instrument panel for the

right front passenger’s air bag. Do not open or

break the air bag coverings.

Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle

Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.

There are parts of the air bag system in several places

around your vehicle. You don’t want the system to

inflate while someone is working on your vehicle.

Your dealer and the service manual have information

about servicing your vehicle and the air bag system.

To purchase a service manual, see “Service and Owner

Publications” in the Index.

CAUTION:

For up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is

turned off and the battery is disconnected, an air

bag can still inflate during improper service. You

can be injured if you are close to an air bag when

it inflates. Avoid wires wrapped with yellow tape

or yellow connectors. They are probably part

of the air bag system. Be sure to follow proper

service procedures, and make sure the person

performing work for you is qualified to do so.

The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.

1-29

Adding Equipment to Your Air

Bag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: If I add a push bumper or a bicycle rack to

the front of my vehicle, will it keep the air bags

from working properly?

A: As long as the push bumper or bicycle rack is

attached to your vehicle so that the vehicle’s basic

structure isn’t changed, it’s not likely to keep the

air bags from working properly in a crash.

Q: Is there anything I might add to the front of

the vehicle that could keep the air bags from

working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s

frame, bumper system, front end sheet metal or

height, they may keep the air bag system from

working properly. Also, the air bag system may

not work properly if you relocate any of the air bag

sensors. If you have any questions about this,

you should contact Customer Assistance before

you modify your vehicle. The phone numbers and

addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two

of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this

manual. See “Customer Satisfaction Procedure”

in the Index.

Center Front Passenger Position

(4-Door Models with Front Bench Seat)

Lap Belt

If your vehicle has a front bench seat, someone can sit in

the center position.

1-30

When you sit in the center front seating position, you have

a lap safety belt, which has no retractor. To make the belt

longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt.

To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown until

the belt is snug.

Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap

part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt isn’t long enough,

see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section.

Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned

so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly

if you ever had to.

1-31

Rear Seat Passengers

It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up!

Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear

seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are

wearing safety belts.

Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrown

out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others

in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.

Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions

Lap-Shoulder Belt

The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder

belts. Here’s how to wear one properly.

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.

Don’t let it get twisted. The shoulder belt may lock

if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this

happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.

Then pull the belt across you more slowly.

1-32

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.

When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way,

it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and

start again.

If the belt is not long enough, see “Safety Belt

Extender” at the end of this section.

Make sure the release button on the buckle is

positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the

safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle

end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.

1-33

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on

the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies

force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely

to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt

would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause

serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should

go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts

of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash.

The safety belt also locks if you pull the belt very

quickly out of the retractor.

CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is

too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too

much, which could increase injury. The shoulder

belt should fit against your body.

1-34

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.

Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides

for Children and Small Adults

(4-Door Models)

Four-door models have rear shoulder belt comfort

guides. This feature will provide added safety belt

comfort for older children who have outgrown booster

seats and for small adults. When installed on a shoulder

belt, the comfort guide better positions the belt away

from the neck and head.

There is one guide for each outside passenger position

in the rear seat. To provide added safety belt comfort

for children who have outgrown child restraints and for

smaller adults, the comfort guides may be installed on

the shoulder belts. Here’s how to install a comfort guide

and use the safety belt:

1-35

1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of

the seatback and the interior body to remove the

guide from its storage clip.

2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic

cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide

over the belt, and insert the two edges of the belt into

the slots of the guide.

1-36

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.

The elastic cord must be under the belt and the

guide on top.

4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as

described in “Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions”

earlier in this section. Make sure that the shoulder

belt crosses the shoulder.

To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the

belt edges together so that you can take them out from

the guides. Pull the guide upward to expose its storage

clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip. Turn the

guide and clip inward and in between the seatback and

the interior body, leaving only the loop of the elastic

cord exposed.

1-37

Center Rear Passenger Position

(4-Door Models) Lap Belt

When you sit in the center rear seating position,

you have a lap safety belt which has a retractor.

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.

Don’t let it get twisted.

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.

3. Feed the lap belt into the retractor to tighten it.

1-38

4. Position and release it the same way as the lap part

of a lap-shoulder belt.

If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt

Extender” at the end of this section. Make sure the

release button on the buckle is positioned so you

would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly

if you ever had to.

Children

Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes

infants and all other children. Neither the distance

traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the

need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,

the law in every state in the United States and in every

Canadian province says children up to some age must

be restrained while in a vehicle.

Infants and Young Children

Every time infants and young children ride in

vehicles, they should have the protection provided by

the appropriate restraint. Young children should not use

the vehicle’s safety belts, unless there is no other choice.

1-39

CAUTION:

People should never hold a baby in their arms

while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh

much -- until a crash. During a crash a baby

will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it.

CAUTION: (Continued)

For example, in a crash at only 25 mph (40 km/h),

a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly become a

240-lb. (110 kg) force on a person’s arms. A baby

should be secured in an appropriate restraint.

1-40

CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very close to,

any air bag when it inflates can be seriously

injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder belts

offer outstanding protection for adults and older

children, but not for young children and infants.

Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air

bag system is designed for them. Young children

and infants need the protection that a child

restraint system can provide.

Q: What are the different types of add-on

child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased

by the vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic

types. Selection of a particular restraint should

take into consideration not only the child’s weight,

height and age but also whether or not the restraint

will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which

it will be used.

For most basic types of child restraints, there are

many different models available. When purchasing

a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used

in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a

label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle

safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that

come with the restraint state the weight and

height limitations for a particular child restraint.

In addition, there are many kinds of restraints

available for children with special needs.

1-41

CAUTION:

Newborn infants need complete support,

including support for the head and neck. This is

necessary because a newborn infant’s neck is

weak and its head weighs so much compared

with the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in

a rear-facing seat settles into the restraint, so

the crash forces can be distributed across the

strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and

shoulders. Infants always should be secured in

appropriate infant restraints.

CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child is quite

unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom

the safety belts are designed. A young child’s

hip bones are still so small that vehicle’s regular

safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones,

as it should. Instead, it may settle up around the

child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply

force on a body area that’s unprotected by any

bony structure. This alone could cause serious or

fatal injuries. Young children always should be

secured in appropriate child restraints.

1-42

Restraint Systems for Children

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a

motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed to

restrain or position a child on a continuous flat surface.

Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward the center

of the vehicle.

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with

the seating surface against the back of the infant.

The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a

crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.

1-43

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for

the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes

with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to

improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.

Some booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner,

and some high-back booster seats have a five-point

harness. A booster seat can also help a child to see out

the window.

1-44

Q: How do child restraints work?

A: A child restraint system is any device designed for

use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position

children. A built-in child restraint system is a

permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on

child restraint system is a portable one, which is

purchased by the vehicle’s owner.

For many years, add-on child restraints have

used the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help

reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to

be secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt

system secures the add-on child restraint in the

vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness

system holds the child in place within the restraint.

One system, the three-point harness, has straps

that come down over each of the infant’s shoulders

and buckle together at the crotch. The five-point

harness system has two shoulder straps, two hip

straps and a crotch strap. A shield may take the

place of hip straps.

A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that are

attached to a flat pad which rests low against the

child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has

straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield

that swings up or to the side.

When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child

restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is,

it will have a label saying that it meets federal motor

vehicle safety standards.

Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may

find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a

booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in

your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured within

the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury.

When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the

instructions that come with the restraint which may be

on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this

manual. The child restraint instructions are important,

so if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy

from the manufacturer.

1-45

Where to Put the Restraint

Accident statistics show that children are safer if they

are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.

General Motors, therefore, recommends that child

restraints be secured in a rear seat outside position

including an infant riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a

child riding in a forward-facing child seat and an older

child riding in a booster seat. Never put a rear-facing

child restraint in the front passenger seat. Here’s why:

CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be

seriously injured or killed if the right front

passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because the

back of the rear-facing child restraint would

be very close to the inflating air bag. Always

secure a rear-facing child restraint in a rear

seat outside position.

CAUTION: (Continued)

You may secure a forward-facing child restraint

in the right front seat, but before you do, always

move the front passenger seat as far back as it

will go. It’s better to secure the child restraint

in a rear seat outside position.

Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child

restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move

around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people

in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child

restraint in your vehicle -- even when no child is in it.

1-46

Top Strap

Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.”

It can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.

For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored to

the vehicle.

If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one

can be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.

Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a

kit is available.

In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing

child restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be

anchored. In the United States, some child restraints also

have a top strap. If your child restraint has a top strap,

it should be anchored.

Anchor brackets for the rear outside seat positions are

located on the floor in the cargo area of your vehicle.

1-47

If your vehicle is equipped with the rear convenience

system, there will be plugs covering the anchor brackets.

To remove the plugs, grasp the edges of the plugs and

pull them out. See “Rear Convenience System” in the

Index for more information. Don’t use the rear set of

tie-down brackets near the liftgate/endgate or the center

tie-down bracket near the rear seats.

Anchor the top strap to one of these anchor points.

Be sure to use an anchor point located on the same

side of the vehicle as the seating position where the

child restraint will be placed.

Once you have the top strap anchored, you’ll be ready

to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top

strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions say.

1-48

Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear

Outside Seat Position

You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier

part about the top strap if the child restraint has one.

Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the

child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint

when and as the instructions say.

1. Put the restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder

portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or

around the restraint. The child restraint instructions

will show you how.

If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face

or neck, put it behind the child restraint.

3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is

positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the

safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-49

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of

the retractor to set the lock. 5. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into

the retractor while you push down on the child restraint.

If you’re using a forward-facing child restraint, you

may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on

the child restraint as you tighten the belt.

6. Push and pull the child restraint in different

directions to be sure it is secure.

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s

safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt

will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult

or larger child passenger.

1-50

Center Seat Positions (4-Door Models)

Don’t use child restraints in these positions.

The restraints won’t work properly.

Securing a Child Restraint in the Right

Front Seat Position

Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag. Never

put a rear-facing child restraint in this seat. Here’s why:

CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be

seriously injured or killed if the right front

passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because the

back of the rear-facing child restraint would be

very close to the inflating air bag. Always secure

a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat.

1-51

Although a rear seat is a safer place, you can secure a

forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat.

You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier

part about the top strap if the child restraint has one.

Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the

child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint

when and as the instructions say.

1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger air

bag, always move the seat as far back as it will go

before securing a forward-facing child restraint.

See “Seats” in the Index.

2. Put the restraint on the seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder

portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or

around the restraint. The child restraint instructions

will show you how.

If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face

or neck, put it behind the child restraint.

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is

positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the

safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-52

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of

the retractor to set the lock. 6. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into

the retractor while you push down on the child restraint

You may find it helpful to use your knee to push down

on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.

7. Push and pull the child restraint in different

directions to be sure it is secure.

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s

safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt

will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult

or larger child passenger.

1-53

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seats should

wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

If you have the choice, a child should sit next to a

window so the child can wear a lap-shoulder belt and

get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?

A: If possible, an older child should wear a

lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a

shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt should

not cross the face or neck. The lap belt should fit

snugly below the hips, just touching the top of the

thighs. It should never be worn over the abdomen,

which could cause severe or even fatal internal

injuries in a crash.

Accident statistics show that children are safer if they

are restrained in the rear seat.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike

other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown

out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety

belts properly.

1-54

CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here two children are wearing the same belt.

The belt can’t properly spread the impact forces.

In a crash, the two children can be crushed

together and seriously injured. A belt must be

used by only one person at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,

but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is

very close to the child’s face or neck?

A: Move the child toward the center of the vehicle,

but be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the

child’s shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper

body would have the restraint that belts provide.

If the child is sitting in a rear outside position of a

four-door model, see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort

Guides” in the Index. If the child is so small that

the shoulder belt is still very close to the child’s

face or neck, you might want to place the child in

a seat that has a lap belt, if your vehicle has one.

1-55

CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a

lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is behind

the child. If the child wears the belt in this way,

in a crash the child might slide under the belt.

The belt’s force would then be applied right on

the child’s abdomen. That could cause serious or

fatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt

should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching

the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s

pelvic bones in a crash.

1-56

Safety Belt Extender

If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,

you should use it.

But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your

dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go

in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the

extender will be long enough for you. The extender will

be just for you, and just for the seat in your vehicle that

you choose. Don’t let someone else use it, and use it

only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear it, just attach it

to the regular safety belt.

Checking Your Restraint Systems

Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light

and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and

anchorages are working properly. Look for any other

loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see

anything that might keep a safety belt system from

doing its job, have it repaired.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in

a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.

If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and

have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system

does not need regular maintenance.)

Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash

If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts?

After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.

But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn

during a more severe crash, then you need new belts.

If you ever see a label on

the driver’s or the right

front passenger’s safety belt

that says to replace the belt,

be sure to do so. Then the

new belt will be there to

help protect you in a

collision. You would see

this label on the belt near

the door opening.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision

damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt

or seat parts repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs

may be necessary even if the belt wasn’t being used at the

time of the collision.

If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag system

parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier in this section.

2- 2-1

Section 2 Features and Controls

Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your vehicle, and information on starting,

shifting and braking. Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is

working properly -- and what to do if you have a problem.

2-2 Windows

2-5 Keys

2-7 Door Locks

2-11 Keyless Entry System (If Equipped)

2-14 Endgate/Liftgate

2-18 Theft

2-19 Content Theft-Deterrent (If Equipped)

2-20 Passlock

2-21 New Vehicle “Break-In”

2-21 Ignition Positions

2-23 Starting Your Engine

2-25 Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)

2-26 Automatic Transmission Operation

2-29 Manual Transmission Operation

2-31 Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)

2-38 Parking Brake

2-39 Shifting Into PARK (P)

(Automatic Transmission Only)

2-43 Shifting Out of PARK (P)

(Automatic Transmission Only)

2-44 Parking Over Things That Burn

2-44 Engine Exhaust

2-45 Running Your Engine While You’re Parked

(Automatic Transmission)

2-46 Locking Rear Axle

2-47 Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

2-53 Exterior Lamps

2-56 Interior Lamps

2-58 Mirrors

2-61 Storage Compartments

2-76 Accessory Power Outlets

2-80 Sunroof (If Equipped)

2-80 HomeLink Transmitter (If Equipped)

2-84 The Instrument Panel--Your

Information System

2-89 Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators

2-2

Windows

CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with the windows

closed is dangerous. A child can be overcome

by the extreme heat and can suffer permanent

injuries or even death from heat stroke.

Never leave a child alone in a vehicle, especially

with the windows closed in warm or hot weather.

2-3

Manual Windows

Turn the hand crank on each door to raise or lower your

manual side door windows.

Power Windows (If Equipped)

If you have power windows, the controls are located on

the armrests on each of the side doors. The switches

operate the windows when the ignition is RUN,

ACCESSORY or when Retained Accessory Power

(RAP) is active. (See “Retained Accessory Power” in

the Index.) The driver’s door has a switch for the

passenger windows as well.

Press the side of the switch with the down arrow to

lower a window. Press the side of the switch with the

up arrow to raise the window.

2-4

Express-Down Window

The driver’s window has an express-down feature

that allows you to lower it without holding the window

switch. Press the driver’s window switch down briefly

to activate the express-down feature. Lightly tap the

switch to open the window slightly. The express-down

feature can be interrupted at any time by pressing the

up arrow end of the switch.

Lockout Switch

Four-door vehicles have a lockout feature to prevent

passengers from operating the power windows. It is

located on the driver’s door armrest. Press LOCK to

activate this feature. Press NORM and the windows

will return to normal operation.

Swing-Out Windows (2-Door Only)

If your vehicle has

rear swing-out windows,

unlatch them at the clasps

and push out on the glass

to open them.

When you close the window, be sure the latch catches.

2-5

Keys

CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition

key is dangerous for many reasons. A child or

others could be badly injured or even killed.

They could operate the power windows or

other controls or even make the vehicle move.

Don’t leave the keys in a vehicle with children.

2-6

This vehicle has one

double-sided key for the

ignition, endgate/liftgate,

spare tire lock (two-door

vehicles) and door locks.

It will fit with either

side up.

When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer provides the

owner with a pair of identical keys and a key code number.

The key code number tells your dealer or a qualified

locksmith how to make extra keys. Keep this number in

a safe place. If you lose your keys, you’ll be able to have

new ones made easily using this number. Your selling

dealer should also have this number.

NOTICE:

Your vehicle has a number of new features that

can help prevent theft. But you can have a lot of

trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock

your key inside. You may even have to damage

your vehicle to get in. So be sure you have an

extra key.

If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle, contact

roadside assistance for help. See “Roadside Assistance”

in the Index for more information.

2-7

Door Locks

CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.

Passengers -- especially children -- can easily

open the doors and fall out of a moving

vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle

won’t open it. You increase the chance of

being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash

if the doors aren’t locked. So, wear safety

belts properly and lock the doors whenever

you drive.

Young children who get into unlocked

vehicles may be unable to get out. A child

can be overcome by extreme heat and can

suffer permanent injuries or even death

from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle

whenever you leave it.

Outsiders can easily enter through an

unlocked door when you slow down or stop

your vehicle. Locking your doors can help

prevent this from happening.

There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle:

You can use the keyless entry system, if your vehicle

has this feature.

You can use your key to unlock your door from

the outside.

You can use the power lock switch (if equipped) to

lock or unlock the doors.

To manually lock a door from the inside, slide the

manual lever on your door down. To manually

unlock a door from the inside, slide the lever on

the door up. You will see a colored area on the lever

when the door is unlocked.

2-8

Power Door Locks (If Equipped)

If your vehicle has power door locks, the switches are

located on the driver’s and passenger’s front armrests.

Remove the ignition key and press LOCK to lock all the

doors at once. To unlock the doors, press the raised area

to the right of the key symbol.

On four-door models use the manual door lock/unlock

lever on each rear door to lock or unlock those doors

from the rear seating area.

Programmable Automatic Door Locks

(If Equipped)

If your vehicle has power door locks, it will be equipped

with an auto lock/unlock feature which enables you to

program your vehicle’s power door locks.

The following is the list of available programming options:

All doors lock/Driver’s door unlocks only: Press

the lock side of the power lock switch on the door

panel once and then the unlock side once. This

option is unavailable on most vehicles not equipped

with keyless entry.

All doors lock/All doors unlock: Press the lock

side of the power lock switch on the door panel once,

and then press the unlock side twice.

All doors lock/None of the doors unlock: Press the

lock side of the power lock switch on the door panel

once, and then press the unlock side of the switch

three times.

No doors lock/None of the doors unlock: Press the

lock side of the power lock switch on the door panel

twice. This turns off the automatic lock feature

(this is the factory setting).

2-9

Your vehicle left the factory programmed to have no

doors lock and none of the doors unlock. You can set the

automatic lock feature to lock all the doors when the

vehicle speed is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h) for

two seconds, and then unlock all the doors once the key

is removed from the ignition. The following instructions

detail how to program your door locks differently than

the factory setting. Choose one of the four programming

options listed above before entering the program mode.

To enter the program mode you need to do the following:

1. Begin with the ignition in OFF. Then pull the turn

signal/multifunction lever toward you and hold it

there while you perform the next step.

2. Turn the key to RUN and OFF twice. Then, with the

key in OFF, release the turn signal/multifunction

lever. Once you do this, you will hear the lock switch

lock and unlock and a 30 second program timer

will begin.

3. You are now ready to program the automatic

door locks. Select one of the four programming

options listed above, and follow the instructions.

You will have 30 seconds to begin programming.

If you exceed the 30 second limit, the locks will

automatically lock and unlock to indicate that you

have left the program mode. If this occurs, repeat the

procedure beginning with Step 1.

You can exit the program mode any time by turning the

ignition to RUN (the locks will automatically lock and

unlock to indicate that you are leaving the program mode).

If the lock/unlock switches are not pressed while in the

programming mode, the current auto lock/unlock setting

will not be modified.

See your dealer for more information.

2-10

Rear Door Security Lock (If Equipped)

With this feature, you can

lock the rear doors so they

can’t be opened from the

inside by passengers.

To use the security locks:

1. Open one of the rear doors.

2. You will find a security lock lever on the inside edge

of the rear door. Move the lever up to engage the

security lock. Move the lever down to disengage the

security lock.

3. Close the door.

4. Do the same thing to the other rear door.

The rear doors of your vehicle cannot be opened from

the inside when this feature is in use. If you want to

open the rear door when the security lock is on, unlock

the door and open the door from the outside.

Lockout Prevention

This feature stops the power door locks from locking

when the keys are in the ignition and a door is open, to

protect you from locking your key in the vehicle.

If the power lock switch is pressed when a door is open

and the key is in the ignition, all the doors will lock and

the driver’s door will unlock.

Leaving Your Vehicle

If you are leaving the vehicle, take your key, open your

door and set the locks from inside. Then get out and

close the door.

2-11

Keyless Entry System (If Equipped)

If your vehicle has this feature, you can lock and unlock

your doors from about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet (9 m)

away using the remote keyless entry transmitter supplied

with your vehicle.

If your vehicle has this feature, you can lock and unlock

your doors and rear endgate from about 3 feet (1 m) up

to 30 feet (9 m) away using the remote keyless entry

transmitter supplied with your vehicle.

Your keyless entry system operates on a radio frequency

subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC)

Rules and with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause harmful interference,

and (2) this device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may cause

undesired operation.

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired operation of

the device.

Changes or modifications to this system by other than

an authorized service facility could void authorization to

use this equipment.

At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is

normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the

transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer

to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:

Check the distance. You may be too far from your

vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy

or snowy weather.

Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be

blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or

right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.

Check to determine if battery replacement or

resynchronization is necessary. See the instructions

that follow.

If you’re still having trouble, see your dealer or a

qualified technician for service.

2-12

Operation

UNLOCK: When you press UNLOCK, the driver’s

door will unlock automatically, the parking lamps will

flash and the interior lamps will go on. If you press

UNLOCK again within three seconds, the remaining

doors will unlock, the parking lamps will flash and the

interior lamps will go on.

LOCK: Press LOCK to lock all the doors. Press LOCK

again within three seconds and the horn will chirp.

REAR: When you press the REAR button twice within

three seconds to release the rear liftgate glass, the

parking lamps will flash and the interior lamps will go

on. If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, the

transmission must be in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).

If your vehicle has a manual transmission, you must

engage the parking brake.

Remote Panic Alarm

When the button with the horn symbol on the key

transmitter is pressed, the horn will sound and the

headlamps and taillamps will flash for up to 30 seconds.

This can be turned off by pressing the horn button again,

waiting for 30 seconds, or starting the vehicle.

Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle

Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to

prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.

If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be

purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring any

remaining transmitters with you when you go to your

dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement

transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters

must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the

new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock your

vehicle. Each vehicle can have only four transmitters

matched to it.

Battery Replacement

Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless

entry transmitter should last about two years.

You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t

work at the normal range in any location. If you have to

get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,

it’s probably time to change the battery.

2-13

NOTICE:

When replacing the battery, use care not to touch any

of the circuitry. Static from your body transferred

to these surfaces may damage the transmitter.

To replace the battery in the keyless entry transmitter

do the following:

1. Insert a dime in the slot between the covers of

the transmitter housing near the key ring hole.

Remove the bottom by twisting the dime.

2. Remove and replace the battery with a three-volt

CR2032 or equivalent battery, positive (+) side up.

3. Align the covers and snap them together.

4. Resynchronize the transmitter.

5. Check the operation of the transmitter.

Resynchronization

Resynchronization may be necessary due to the security

method used by this system. The transmitter does not

send the same signal twice to the receiver. The receiver

will not respond to a signal it has been sent previously.

This prevents anyone from recording and playing back

the signal from the transmitter.

To resynchronize your transmitter, stand close to your

vehicle and press and hold the LOCK and UNLOCK

buttons on the transmitter at the same time for seven

seconds. The door locks should cycle to confirm

synchronization. If the locks do not cycle, see your

dealer for service.

2-14

Endgate/Liftgate

CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with the rear

window, endgate or liftgate open because carbon

monoxide (CO) gas can come into your vehicle.

You can’t see or smell CO. It can cause

unconsciousness and even death.

If you must drive with the rear window, endgate

or liftgate open or if electrical wiring or other

cable connections must pass through the seal

between the body and the rear window, endgate

or liftgate:

Make sure all other windows are shut.

Turn the fan on your heating or cooling

system to its highest speed with the setting

on VENT or OUTSIDE AIR. That will force

outside air into your vehicle. See “Comfort

Controls” in the Index.

If you have air outlets on or under the

instrument panel, open them all the way.

See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.

Endgate Release

To open a manual lock system from the outside,

insert the key into the lock and turn it counterclockwise

to unlock the glass.

To open a power lock system from the outside, insert the

key into the lock button and turn it counterclockwise.

All the doors will then unlock.

If your vehicle is equipped with the keyless entry system,

your vehicle does not have a lock on the endgate. It is

equipped with a pushbutton to release the glass.

You may also use the keyless entry system, or the

power door locks (if equipped).

2-15

When the doors are

unlocked, press the

button to open the glass.

Reach inside the endgate

to lift the handle and open

the endgate.

The endgate can be opened without a key if the driver’s

door is unlocked. The endgate glass will not release if

the vehicle is in gear.

To lock a power lock system from the outside, insert the

key into the lock button and turn clockwise. All doors

will lock.

Liftgate Release

To open a power lock system from the outside, insert

the key into the lock button and turn counterclockwise.

All doors will unlock.

If your vehicle is equipped with the keyless entry

system, your vehicle does not have a lock on the liftgate.

It is equipped with a pushbutton to release the liftglass.

You may also use the keyless entry system, or the power

door locks, (if equipped).

2-16

The liftglass can be opened

using the pushbutton on

the liftgate after the

driver’s door has been

opened using either the

power lock system or the

keyless entry system.

To open the entire liftgate, lift the handle located in the

center of the door.

To lock a power lock system from the outside, insert the

key into the lock button and turn clockwise. All doors

will lock. You may also use the keyless entry system or

the power door locks to lock the liftgate and liftglass.

Remote Rear Glass Release

This button, located to

the right of the steering

wheel on the instrument

panel, allows you to

release the rear glass

from inside the vehicle.

If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, your shift

lever must be in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) for the

release to work.

If you have a manual transmission, you must apply your

parking brake or have the ignition off before you can

open the endgate glass.

2-17

Emergency Release for Opening

Endgate/Liftgate

1. Peel back or slit the carpet locally to expose the

access hole in the trim panel.

2. Use a thin screwdriver

to reach through the

access holes in both

the trim panel and the

hardware cover.

3. Pry the release lever toward the passenger’s side

until the glass latch pops open.

4. Reattach the carpet securely.

Endgate-Mounted Spare

If your vehicle has an endgate-mounted spare tire

carrier, you must move the carrier arm out of the way

to open the glass.

Here’s how to move the arm:

1. Squeeze the release handle to free the carrier arm.

2. Swing the carrier arm away from the endgate.

You may need to give it a slight tug.

3. To latch the carrier arm, swing it toward the endgate.

2-18

Theft

Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.

Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent

features, we know that nothing we put on it can make

it impossible to steal. However, there are ways you

can help.

Key in the Ignition

If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an

easy target for joy riders or professional thieves -- so

don’t do it.

When you park your vehicle and open the driver’s door,

you’ll hear a chime reminding you to remove your key

from the ignition and take it with you. Always do this.

Your steering wheel will be locked, and so will your

ignition. If you have an automatic transmission,

taking your key out also locks your transmission.

Also remember to lock the doors.

Parking at Night

Park in a lighted spot, close all windows and lock your

vehicle. Remember to keep your valuables out of sight.

Put them in a storage area, or take them with you.

Parking Lots

Even if you park in a lot where someone will be

watching your vehicle, it’s still best to lock it up and

take your keys. But what if you have to leave your

ignition key? What if you have to leave something

valuable in your vehicle?

Put your valuables in a storage area, like your

glove box.

If your vehicle has a remote keyless entry system,

take the transmitter with you.

Lock all the doors except the driver’s.

2-19

Content Theft-Deterrent (If Equipped)

Your vehicle may be equipped with a content

theft-deterrent alarm system.

With this system, the

SECURITY light will

flash as you open the door

(if your ignition is off).

This light reminds you to activate the theft-deterrent

system. Here’s how to do it:

1. Lock the door with the power door lock switch

(door must be open) or with the remote keyless

entry transmitter (door can be open or closed).

The SECURITY light should come on and stay on.

2. Close all doors. The SECURITY light should go off

after approximately 30 seconds. The alarm is not

armed until the SECURITY light goes off.

If a door is opened without the key or the keyless entry

transmitter, the alarm will go off. Your vehicle’s headlamps

will flash and the horn will sound for 110 seconds, then will

turn off to save the battery power.

Remember, the theft-deterrent system won’t activate if

you lock the doors with a key or use the manual door

lock. It activates only if you use a power door lock

switch (with the door open), or with the keyless entry

transmitter (door can be open or closed). You should

also remember that you can start your vehicle with the

correct ignition key if the alarm has been set off.

Here’s how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident:

If you don’t want to activate the theft-deterrent

system, the vehicle should be locked with the door

key after the doors are closed.

Always unlock a door with a key, or use the keyless

entry transmitter. Unlocking a door any other way

will set off the alarm.

If you set off the alarm by accident, unlock any door

with the key. You can also turn off the alarm by

pressing UNLOCK on the keyless entry transmitter.

The alarm won’t stop if you try to unlock a door any

other way.

2-20

Testing the Alarm

The alarm can be tested by following these steps:

1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’s window

and open the driver’s door.

2. Activate the system by locking the doors with the

power door lock switch (while the door is open), or

with the keyless entry transmitter (with the door

open or closed).

3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait for

the SECURITY light to go out.

4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the

door with the manual door lock and open the door.

This should set off the alarm.

If the alarm does not sound when it should, but the

vehicle’s headlamps flash, check to see if the horn

works. The horn fuse may be blown. To replace the

fuse, see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index.

If the alarm does not sound or the vehicle’s headlamps

do not flash, the vehicle should be serviced by a dealer.

Passlock

Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock

theft-deterrent system.

Passlock is a passive theft-deterrent system. Passlock

enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turned with a

valid key. If a correct key is not used or the ignition lock

cylinder is tampered with, fuel is disabled.

During normal operation, the SECURITY light will go

off approximately five seconds after the key is turned

to RUN.

If the engine stalls and the SECURITY light flashes,

wait about 10 minutes until the light stops flashing

before trying to restart the engine. Remember to release

the key from START as soon as the engine starts.

If the engine does not start after three tries, the vehicle

needs service.

If the engine is running and the SECURITY light

comes on, you will be able to restart the engine if you

turn the engine off. However, your Passlock system is

not working properly and must be serviced by your

dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock at

this time. You may also want to check the fuse

(see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index).

See your dealer for service.

2-21

New Vehicle “Break-In”

NOTICE:

Your vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate “break-in.”

But it will perform better in the long run if you

follow these guidelines:

Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or

less for the first 500 miles (805 km).

Don’t drive at any one speed -- fast or

slow -- for the first 500 miles (805 km).

Don’t make full-throttle starts.

Avoid making hard stops for the first

200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time

your new brake linings aren’t yet broken

in. Hard stops with new linings can mean

premature wear and earlier replacement.

Follow this breaking-in guideline every

time you get new brake linings.

Don’t tow a trailer during break-in.

See “Towing a Trailer” in the Index for

more information.

Ignition Positions

Use the key to turn the ignition switch to five

different positions.

ACCESSORY (A): This position lets you use things

like the radio and the windshield wipers when the

engine is off. Push in the key and turn it toward you.

Your steering wheel will remain locked, just as it was

before you inserted the key.

2-22

NOTICE:

Don’t operate accessories in the ACCESSORY

position for long periods of time. Prolonged

operation of accessories in the ACCESSORY

position could drain your battery and prevent

you from starting your vehicle.

LOCK (B): This position locks your ignition, steering

wheel and transmission. It’s a theft-deterrent feature.

You will only be able to remove your key when the

ignition is turned to LOCK.

CAUTION:

On manual transmission vehicles, turning the key

to LOCK will lock the steering column and result

in a loss of ability to steer the vehicle. This could

cause a collision. If you need to turn the engine

off while the vehicle is moving, turn the key only

to OFF. Don’t press the key release button while

the vehicle is moving.

NOTICE:

If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you can’t

turn it, be sure you are using the correct key;

if so, is it all the way in? If it is, then turn the

steering wheel left and right while you turn the

key hard. But turn the key only with your hand.

Using a tool to force it could break the key or the

ignition switch. If none of this works, then your

vehicle needs service.

OFF (C): This position lets you turn off the engine

but still turn the steering wheel. Use OFF if you must

have your vehicle in motion while the engine is off

(for example, if your vehicle is being towed).

RUN (D): This is the position for driving.

START (E): This position starts your engine.

2-23

Key Release Button

The key cannot be

removed from the ignition

of manual transmission

vehicles unless the key

release button is used.

To remove the key on manual transmission vehicles,

turn the key to OFF. Then turn the key to LOCK while

pressing the key release button down at the same time.

Pull the key straight out.

On automatic transmission vehicles, turn the key to

LOCK and pull it straight out.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)

Your vehicle is equipped with a Retained Accessory

Power (RAP) feature which will allow certain features

of your vehicle to continue to work for up to 20 minutes

after the ignition key is turned to OFF.

Your radio, power windows, sunroof and overhead

console will work when the ignition key is in RUN or

ACCESSORY. Once the key is turned from RUN to OFF,

these features will continue to work for up to 20 minutes

or until a door is opened.

Starting Your Engine

Automatic Transmission

Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).

Your engine won’t start in any other position -- that’s

a safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,

use NEUTRAL (N) only.

NOTICE:

Don’t try to shift to PARK (P) if your vehicle

is moving. If you do, you could damage the

transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when

your vehicle is stopped.

2-24

Manual Transmission

The gear selector should be in NEUTRAL and the

parking brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal to the floor

and start the engine. Your vehicle won’t start if the clutch

pedal is not all the way down -- that’s a safety feature.

1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn your

ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let

go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your

engine gets warm.

NOTICE:

Holding your key in START for longer than

15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to

be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat

can damage your starter motor. Wait about

15 seconds between each try to help avoid

draining your battery or damaging your starter.

2. If it doesn’t start within 10 seconds, hold your key in

START for not more than 10 seconds. Then, push

the accelerator pedal all the way down for five more

seconds, unless it starts sooner.

3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then

stops), wait 15 seconds and start over.

When the engine starts, let go of the key and the

accelerator pedal.

NOTICE:

Your engine is designed to work with the

electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical

parts or accessories, you could change the way

the engine operates. Before adding electrical

equipment, check with your dealer. If you don’t,

your engine might not perform properly.

2-25

Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)

In very cold weather, 0 F (-18 C) or colder, the engine

coolant heater can help. You’ll get easier starting and

better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually,

the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of

four hours prior to starting your vehicle.

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.

The cord is located on the driver’s side of the engine

compartment, behind the underhood fuse block.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet

could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong

kind of extension cord could overheat and cause

a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the

cord into a properly grounded three-prong

110-volt AC outlet. If the cord won’t reach, use a

heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for

at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and store

the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving

engine parts. If you don’t, it could be damaged.

How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged

in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the

kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of

trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact

your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your

vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that

particular area.

2-26

Automatic Transmission Operation

Your automatic transmission may have a shift lever

located on the console between the seats or on the

steering column.

There are several different positions for your shift lever.

If your vehicle is equipped with a column shift lever,

it features an electronic shift position indicator within

the instrument panel cluster. This display must be

powered anytime the shift lever is capable of being

moved out of PARK (P). This means that if your key

is in OFF, but not locked, there will be a small current

drain on your battery which could discharge your battery

over a period of time. If you need to leave your key

in the ignition in OFF for an extended period, it is

recommended that you disconnect the battery cable

from the battery to prevent discharging your battery.

PARK (P): This position locks your rear wheels. It’s the

best position to use when you start your engine because

your vehicle can’t move easily.

CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the

shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the

parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.

Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is

running unless you have to. If you have left the

engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.

You or others could be injured. To be sure your

vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly

level ground, always set your parking brake and

move the shift lever to PARK (P).

See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index. If you

have four-wheel drive, your vehicle will be free to

roll -- even if your shift lever is in PARK (P) -- if

your transfer case is in NEUTRAL. So, be sure

the transfer case is in a drive gear -- not in

NEUTRAL. See “Four-Wheel Drive (Automatic

Transfer Case)” in the Index. If you’re pulling a

trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.

2-27

Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before

starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic

transmission shift lock control system. You have to

fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift

from PARK (P) when the ignition key is in RUN. If you

cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift

lever -- push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P)

(press the button in on the console shift lever) as you

maintain brake application. Then move the shift lever

into the gear you wish. See “Shifting Out of PARK (P)”

in the Index.

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

NOTICE:

Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle is

moving forward could damage your transmission.

Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle

is stopped.

To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,

ice or sand without damaging your transmission, see

“Stuck In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the Index.

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn’t

connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re already

moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.

CAUTION:

Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) while

your engine is “racing” (running at high speed)

is dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the

brake pedal, your vehicle could move very

rapidly. You could lose control and hit people

or objects. Don’t shift out of PARK (P) or

NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is racing.

NOTICE:

Damage to your transmission caused by shifting

out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with the

engine racing isn’t covered by your warranty.

2-28

DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving.

If you need more power for passing, and you’re:

Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h),

push your accelerator pedal about halfway down.

Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more,

push the accelerator all the way down.

You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power.

DRIVE (D) should not be used when towing a trailer,

carrying a heavy load, driving on steep hills or for

off-road driving. Select THIRD (3) when operating the

vehicle under any of these conditions.

THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal

driving, however it offers more power and lower fuel

economy than DRIVE (D). You should use THIRD (3)

when towing a trailer, carrying a heavy load, driving on

steep hills or winding roads or for off-road driving.

SECOND (2): This position gives you more power

but lower fuel economy than THIRD (3). You can use

SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speed as

you go down steep mountain roads, but then you would

also want to use your brakes off and on.

You can also use SECOND (2) for starting your vehicle

from a stop on slippery road surfaces.

FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power

but lower fuel economy than SECOND (2). You can use

it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the shift

lever is put in FIRST (1) while the vehicle is moving

forward, the transmission won’t shift into first gear until

the vehicle is going slowly enough.

NOTICE:

If your rear wheels can’t turn, don’t try to drive.

This might happen if you were stuck in very deep

sand or mud or were up against a solid object.

You could damage your transmission.

Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold

your vehicle there with only the accelerator pedal.

This could overheat and damage the transmission.

Use your brakes or shift into PARK (P) to hold

your vehicle in position on a hill.

2-29

Tow/Haul Selector Switch (If Equipped)

Console Mount Shift Mount

Your vehicle may be equipped with a tow/haul selector

switch. This switch will be located on the floor console

or on the side of the shift lever on some models.

If your vehicle is equipped with the tow/haul selector

switch, you can use this feature to more efficiently tow

or haul a heavy load.

To select the tow/haul mode, press in on the switch.

The Tow/Haul light on the instrument panel cluster will

come on. To go back to normal operation, press the

switch again. The indicator light on the instrument panel

cluster will go out. See “Tow/Haul Mode” in the Index

for more information.

Manual Transmission Operation

5-Speed

This is your shift pattern.

Here’s how to operate your manual transmission:

FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into

FIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as

you press the accelerator pedal.

You can shift into FIRST (1) when you’re going less

than 20 mph (30 km/h). If you’ve come to a complete

stop and it’s hard to shift into FIRST (1), put the shift

lever in NEUTRAL and let up on the clutch. Press the

clutch pedal back down. Then shift into FIRST (1).

2-30

SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let up

on the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND (2).

Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the

accelerator pedal.

THIRD, FOURTH AND FIFTH (3, 4 and 5): Shift

into THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5) the same

way you do for SECOND (2). Slowly let up on the

clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.

To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the brake

pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press the clutch pedal

and the brake pedal, and shift to NEUTRAL.

NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start or idle

your engine.

REVERSE (R): To back up, press the clutch pedal,

wait about six seconds, then shift into REVERSE (R).

Then let up on the clutch pedal slowly while pressing

the accelerator pedal.

NOTICE:

Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is

stopped. Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your

vehicle is moving could damage your transmission.

Use REVERSE (R), along with the parking brake, for

parking your vehicle.

Shift Light (If Equipped)

If you have a manual

transmission, you have

a SHIFT light on your

instrument panel cluster.

This light will show you when to shift to the next higher

gear for best fuel economy.

2-31

When this light comes on, you can shift to the next

higher gear if weather, road and traffic conditions let

you. For the best fuel economy, accelerate slowly and

shift when the light comes on.

While you accelerate, it is normal for the light to go

on and off if you quickly change the position of the

accelerator. Ignore the SHIFT light when you downshift.

CAUTION:

If you skip a gear when you downshift, you could

lose control of your vehicle. You could injure

yourself or others. Don’t shift down more than

one gear at a time when you downshift.

If your vehicle has four-wheel drive and is equipped

with a manual transmission, disregard the SHIFT light

when the transfer case is in 4LO.

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)

If your vehicle has four-wheel drive, you can send

your engine’s driving power to all four wheels for extra

traction. To get the most satisfaction out of four-wheel

drive, you must be familiar with its operation. Read the

part that follows before using four-wheel drive.

You should use two-wheel high (2HI) for most

normal driving conditions.

NOTICE:

Driving in the 4HI or 4LO positions for a long

time on dry or wet pavement could shorten the

life of your vehicle’s drivetrain.

2-32

Electronic Transfer Case (If Equipped)

If your four-wheel-drive

vehicle has the electronic

transfer case, the transfer

case switches are to the

right of the steering wheel

on the instrument panel.

Use these switches to shift into and out of four-wheel

drive. You can choose among three driving settings:

2HI: This setting is for driving in most street and

highway situations. Your front axle is not engaged in

two-wheel drive. When this lamp is lit, it is about

one-half as bright as the others.

4HI: This setting engages your front axle to help

drive your vehicle. Use 4HI when you need extra

traction, such as on snowy or icy roads, or in most

off-road situations.

4LO: This setting also engages your front axle to give

you extra traction. You may never need 4LO. It sends

the maximum power to all four wheels. You might

choose 4LO if you were driving off-road in sand, mud

or deep snow and climbing or descending steep hills.

Indicator lights in the switches show you which setting

you are in. The indicator lights will come on briefly

when you turn on the ignition and one will stay on.

If the lights do not come on, you should take your

vehicle in for service. An indicator light will flash while

shifting. It will remain illuminated when the shift

is completed.

Shifting from 2HI to 4HI

Press and release the 4HI switch. This can be done at

any speed, and the front axle will lock automatically.

Shifting from 4HI to 2HI

Press and release the 2HI switch. This can be done at

any speed, and the front axle will unlock automatically.

Shifting from 2HI or 4HI to 4LO

To shift from 2HI or 4HI to 4LO, the vehicle must be

stopped or moving less than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) with

the transmission in NEUTRAL (N) in vehicles equipped

2-33

with an automatic transmission or the clutch pedal

engaged in vehicles equipped with a manual

transmission. The preferred method for shifting into

4LO is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph

(1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and release the 4LO switch.

You must wait for the 4LO indicator light to stop

flashing and remain illuminated before shifting your

transmission into gear or releasing the clutch pedal.

If the 4LO switch is pressed when your vehicle is in

gear and/or moving, the 4LO indicator light will flash

for 30 seconds and not complete the shift unless your

vehicle is moving slower than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) and

the transmission is in NEUTRAL (N) or the clutch

pedal engaged.

On automatic transmission equipped vehicles, if your

transfer case does not shift into 4LO, your transmission

indicator switch may require adjustment. With your

transmission in NEUTRAL (N), press and release the

4LO switch. While the 4LO indicator light is flashing,

shift your transmission into PARK (P). Wait until the

4LO indicator light remains illuminated before shifting

your transmission into gear. This will get you into 4LO,

but you should take your vehicle in for service to restore

normal operation.

Shifting from 4LO to 4HI or 2HI

To shift from 4LO to 4HI or 2HI, your vehicle must

be stopped or moving less than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) with

the transmission in NEUTRAL (N) or the clutch pedal

engaged. The preferred method for shifting out of

4LO is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph

(1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and release the 4HI switch.

You must wait for the 4HI indicator light to stop

flashing and remain illuminated before shifting your

transmission into gear or releasing the clutch pedal.

If the 4HI switch is pressed when your vehicle is in

gear and/or moving, the 4HI indicator light will flash

for 30 seconds but not complete the shift unless the

vehicle is moving slower than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) and

the transmission is in NEUTRAL (N) or the clutch

pedal engaged.

On automatic transmission equipped vehicles, if your

transfer case does not shift into 4HI, your transmission

indicator switch may require adjustment. With your

transmission in NEUTRAL (N), press and release the

4HI switch. While the 4HI indicator light is flashing,

shift your transmission into PARK (P). Wait until the

4HI indicator light remains illuminated before shifting

your transmission into gear. This will get you into 4HI,

but you should take your vehicle in for service to restore

normal operation.

2-34

Automatic Transfer Case (If Equipped)

If your vehicle is equipped

with the automatic transfer

case, the transfer case

switches are located to the

right of the steering wheel

on the instrument panel.

Use these switches to shift into and out of four-wheel

drive. You can choose among four driving settings:

2HI: This setting is used for driving in most street and

highway situations. Your front axle is not engaged in

two-wheel drive. This setting also provides the best

fuel economy.

AUTO 4WD: This setting is ideal for use when road

conditions are variable. When driving your vehicle in

AUTO 4WD, the front axle is engaged, but the vehicle’s

power is sent only to the rear wheels. When the vehicle

senses a loss of traction, the system will automatically

engage four-wheel drive. Driving in this mode results in

slightly lower fuel economy than 2HI.

2-35

4HI: Use 4HI when you need extra traction, such as

on snowy or icy roads or in most off-road situations.

This setting also engages your front axle to help drive

your vehicle.

4LO: This setting also engages your front axle and

delivers extra torque. You may never need 4LO. It sends

maximum power to all four wheels. You might choose

4LO if you are driving off-road in deep sand, deep mud,

deep snow and climbing or descending steep hills.

CAUTION:

Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can cause

your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in

PARK (P), or if you have a manual transmission,

even if you are in gear. You or someone else could

be seriously injured. Be sure to set the parking

brake before placing the transfer case in

NEUTRAL. See “Parking Brake” in the Index.

NEUTRAL: Shift the vehicle’s transfer case to

NEUTRAL only when towing your vehicle. See

“Recreational Vehicle Towing” or “Towing Your

Vehicle” in the Index for more information.

Indicator lights in the switches show which setting you

are in. The indicator lights will come on briefly when

you turn on the ignition and one will stay on. If the

lights do not come on, you should take your vehicle

to your dealer for service. An indicator light will

flash while shifting the transfer case. It will remain

illuminated when the shift is complete. If for some

reason the transfer case cannot make a requested shift,

it will return to the last chosen setting.

If the SERVICE 4WD light stays on, you should take

your vehicle to your dealer for service. See “Service

4WD” in the Index for further information.

Shifting to 4HI or AUTO 4WD

Press and release the 4HI or AUTO 4WD switch.

This can be done at any speed, and the indicator light

will flash while shifting. It will remain illuminated when

the shift is complete.

2-36

Shifting to 2HI

Press and release the 2HI switch. This can be done at

any speed.

Shifting to 4LO

To shift to 4LO, the vehicle’s engine must be running

and the vehicle must be stopped or moving less

than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) with the transmission in

NEUTRAL (N) or with the clutch pedal pressed

for vehicles with manual transmission. The preferred

method for shifting into 4LO is to have your vehicle

moving 1 or 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and

release the 4LO switch. You must wait for the4LO

indicator light to stop flashing and remain illuminated

before shifting your transmission into gear.

If the 4LO switch is pressed when your vehicle is in

gear and/or moving, the 4LO indicator light will flash

for 30 seconds and not complete the shift unless your

vehicle is moving less than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) and the

transmission is in NEUTRAL (N) or with the clutch

pedal pressed for vehicles with manual transmission.

After 30 seconds, the transfer case will return to the

setting last chosen.

Shifting Out of 4LO

To shift from 4LO to 4HI, AUTO 4WD or 2HI, your

vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph

(4.8 km/h) with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N),

or with the clutch pedal pressed for vehicles with manual

transmission, and the engine running. The preferred

method for shifting out of 4LO is to have your vehicle

moving 1 or 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and release

the 4HI, AUTO 4WD or 2HI switch. You must wait for

the 4HI, AUTO 4WD or 2HI indicator light to stop

flashing and remain illuminated before shifting your

transmission into gear.

If the 4HI, AUTO 4WD or 2HI switch is pressed when

your vehicle is in gear and/or moving, the 4HI, AUTO

4WD or 2HI indicator light will flash for 30 seconds but

will not complete the shift unless your vehicle is moving

less than 3mph (4.8 km/h) with the transmission in

NEUTRAL (N) or with the clutch pedal pressed for

vehicles with manual transmission.

2-37

Shifting to NEUTRAL

To shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL, first make sure

the vehicle is parked so that it will not roll:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Start the vehicle.

3. Connect the vehicle to the towing vehicle.

4. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL (N) or

have the clutch pedal pressed for vehicles with

manual transmission.

5. Shift the transfer case to 2HI.

6. Simultaneously press and hold the 2HI and 4LO

buttons for 10 seconds. The NEUTRAL light will

come on when the transfer case shift to NEUTRAL

is complete.

7. Shift the transmission to REVERSE (R) for one

second, then shift the transmission to DRIVE (D)

for one second or FIRST (1) for vehicles with

manual transmission.

8. Turn the ignition to OFF.

9. Place the transmission shift lever in PARK (P) or

FIRST (1) for vehicles with manual transmission.

10. Release the parking brake prior to towing.

Shifting Out of NEUTRAL

To shift out of NEUTRAL:

1. Set the parking brake and apply the regular

brake pedal.

2. Start the vehicle with the transmission in PARK (P)

or FIRST (1) for vehicles with manual transmission.

3. Press the button for the desired transfer case position

(2HI, 4HI, AUTO 4WD or 4LO).

4. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL (N) or press the

clutch pedal for vehicles with manual transmission.

5. Shift the transmission lever to the desired position.

After the transfer case has shifted out of NEUTRAL,

the NEUTRAL light will go out.

6. A re-engagement sound is normal when shifting out

of NEUTRAL.

2-38

Parking Brake

To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal

down with your right foot. Push down the parking brake

pedal with your left foot. If the ignition is on, the brake

system warning light will come on.

To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake

pedal down.

Pull the BRAKE RELEASE lever fully. It is located on

the bottom of the driver’s side of the instrument panel.

NOTICE:

Driving with the parking brake on can cause

your rear brakes to overheat. You may have to

replace them, and you could also damage other

parts of your vehicle.

If you are towing a trailer and you must park on a hill,

see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. That section shows

what to do first to keep the trailer from moving.

2-39

Shifting Into PARK (P)

(Automatic Transmission Only)

CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if

the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the

parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.

If you have left the engine running, the vehicle

can move suddenly. You or others could be

injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move,

even when you’re on fairly level ground, use the

steps that follow. With four-wheel drive, your

vehicle will be free to roll -- even if your shift

lever is in PARK (P) -- if your transfer case is in

NEUTRAL. So be sure the transfer case is in a

drive gear -- not in NEUTRAL. See “Four-Wheel

Drive (Automatic Transfer Case)” in the Index.

Always put the shift lever fully in PARK (P) with

the parking brake firmly set. If you’re pulling a

trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.

Column Shift Lever

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and

set the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) like this:

Pull the lever toward you.

2-40

Move the lever up as far as it will go.

3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.

4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can

leave your vehicle with the key, your vehicle is

in PARK (P).

Console Shift Lever

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and

set the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) position like this:

Hold in the button on the lever.

Push the lever all the way toward the front of

the vehicle.

2-41

3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.

4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you

can leave your vehicle with the key, your vehicle is

in PARK (P).

For models with the tow/haul switch mounted on the

shift lever, use the following procedure to shift your

vehicle into PARK (P):

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot

and set the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) position like this:

Hold in the button on the front of the lever.

Push the lever all the way toward the front of

the vehicle.

3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.

4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you

can leave your vehicle with the key, your vehicle

is in PARK (P).

2-42

Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine

Running (Automatic Transmission Only)

CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with

the engine running. Your vehicle could move

suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)

with the parking brake firmly set. If you have

four-wheel drive, your vehicle will be free to

roll -- even if your shift lever is in PARK (P) -- if

your transfer case is in NEUTRAL. So be sure

the transfer case is in a drive gear -- not in

NEUTRAL. See “Four-Wheel Drive (Automatic

Transfer Case)” in the Index. And, if you leave

the vehicle with the engine running, it could

overheat and even catch fire. You or others

could be injured. Don’t leave your vehicle with

the engine running unless you have to.

If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine

running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and

your parking brake is firmly set before you leave it.

After you’ve moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold

the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move

the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling

it toward you (or pressing the button on a console shift

lever). If you can, it means that the shift lever wasn’t

fully locked into PARK (P).

Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)

If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your

transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the

vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in

the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the

shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”

To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then

shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the

driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into

PARK (P)” in the Index.

When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out

of PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another

vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the

pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,

so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).

2-43

Shifting Out of PARK (P)

(Automatic Transmission Only)

Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock

control system. You have to fully apply the regular

brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the

ignition is in RUN. See “Automatic Transmission

Operation” in the Index.

If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on

the shift lever -- push the shift lever all the way into

PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then

move the shift lever into the gear you want. You must

press the shift lever button on the shift lever.

If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t

shift out of PARK (P), try this:

1. Turn the key to OFF.

2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.

3. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).

4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear

you want.

5. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as possible.

Parking Your Vehicle (Manual

Transmission Models Only)

Before you get out of your vehicle, move the shift

lever into REVERSE (R), and firmly apply the

parking brake. Once the shift lever has been placed into

REVERSE (R) with the clutch pedal pressed in, you can

turn the ignition key to OFF, remove the key and release

the clutch.

If you are parking on a hill, or if your vehicle is pulling

a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.

2-44

Parking Over Things That Burn

CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust

parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don’t park

over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things that

can burn.

Engine Exhaust

CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas

carbon monoxide (CO), which you can’t see or

smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.

You might have exhaust coming in if:

Your exhaust system sounds strange

or different.

Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.

Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.

Your vehicle was damaged when driving over

high points on the road or over road debris.

Repairs weren’t done correctly.

Your vehicle or exhaust system had been

modified improperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into

your vehicle:

Drive it only with all the windows down

to blow out any CO; and

Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

2-45

Running Your Engine While You’re

Parked (Automatic Transmission)

It’s better not to park with the engine running. But if you

ever have to, here are some things to know.

CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate control

system off could allow dangerous exhaust into

your vehicle. See the earlier Caution under

“Engine Exhaust.”

Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly

carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if

the fan switch is at the highest setting. One place

this can happen is a garage. Exhaust -- with

CO -- can come in easily. NEVER park in a

garage with the engine running.

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.

See “Blizzard” in the Index.

CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if

the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the

parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.

Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is

running unless you have to. If you’ve left the

engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.

You or others could be injured. To be sure your

vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly

level ground, always set your parking brake and

move the shift lever to PARK (P).

If you have four-wheel drive, your vehicle

will be free to roll -- even if your shift lever

is in PARK (P) -- if your transfer case is in

NEUTRAL. So be sure the transfer case is in a

drive gear -- not in NEUTRAL. See “Four-Wheel

Drive (Automatic Transfer Case)” in the Index.

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t

move. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index.

If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in

the Index.

2-46

Locking Rear Axle

If your vehicle has this feature, your locking rear axle

can give you additional traction on snow, mud, ice, sand

or gravel. It works like a standard axle most of the time,

but when one of the rear wheels has no traction and

the other does, this feature will allow the wheel with

traction to move the vehicle.

Horn

To sound the horn, press the horn symbols on the

steering wheel pad.

Tilt Wheel (If Equipped)

If you have the tilt steering

wheel, you should adjust

the steering wheel before

you drive. The tilt lever is

located on the driver’s side

of the steering column,

under the turn signal lever.

You can raise it to the highest level to give your legs

more room when you enter and exit the vehicle.

To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull

the lever toward you. Move the steering wheel to a

comfortable level, then release the lever to lock the

wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.

2-47

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering column

includes the following:

Turn and Lane Change Signals

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer

Flash-to-Pass

Windshield Wipers

Windshield Washer

Cruise Control (If Equipped)

Turn and Lane Change Signals

The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two

downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you

to signal a turn or a lane change.

To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or

down. When the turn is finished, the lever will

return automatically.

An arrow on the instrument

panel cluster will flash in

the direction of the turn

or lane change.

To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever

until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you

complete your lane change. The lever will return by

itself when you release it.

2-48

As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows flash

more quickly than normal, a signal bulb may be burned

out and other drivers won’t see your turn signal.

If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an

accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you

signal a turn, check the fuse (see “Fuses and Circuit

Breakers” in the Index) and for burned-out bulbs.

If you have a trailer towing option with added wiring for

the trailer lamps, a different turn signal flasher is used.

With this flasher installed, the signal indicator will flash

even if a turn signal bulb is burned out. Check the front

and rear turn signal lamps regularly to make sure they

are working.

Turn Signal On Chime

If your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile

(1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the turn

signal. To turn off the chime, move the turn signal lever

to the off position.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer

To change the headlamps from low beam to high or

high to low, pull the multifunction lever all the way

toward you. Then release it.

When the high beams

are on, this indicator light

on the instrument panel

cluster will also be on.

Flash-to-Pass

This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to

signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass. It works

even if your headlamps are in the automatic position.

To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, but not

so far that you hear a click.

If your headlamps are in the automatic position or on

low beam, your high-beam headlamps will turn on.

They’ll stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you

and the high-beam indicator on the instrument panel

cluster will come on. Release the lever to return to

normal operation.

2-49

Windshield Wipers

You control the windshield wipers by turning the band

with the wiper symbol on it.

For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to MIST.

Hold it there until the wipers start, then let go.

The wipers will stop after one wipe. If you want

more wipes, hold the band on MIST longer.

You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay

between wipes. This can be very useful in light rain

or snow. Turn the band to choose the delay time.

The closer to LO, the shorter the delay.

For steady wiping at low speed, turn the band away

from you to the LO position. For steady high-speed

wiping, turn the band further, to HI. To stop the wipers,

move the band to the OFF position.

Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades

before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,

carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become

worn or damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.

Windshield Washer

There is a paddle marked with the windshield washer

symbol at the top of the multifunction lever. To spray

washer fluid on the windshield, push the paddle.

The wipers will clear the window and then either stop

or return to your preset speed.

CAUTION:

In freezing weather, don’t use your washer until

the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer

fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking

your vision.

2-50

Rear Window Washer/Wiper

This switch is located on

the instrument panel to the

right of the steering wheel.

To turn the rear wiper on, slide the switch to either

LO or HI. For delayed wiping, slide the switch to LO.

For steady wiping, slide the switch to HI. To turn the

wiper off, slide the switch to OFF.

To wash the window, press the wash button located on

the switch. The switch must be in either LO or HI.

The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle

as the windshield washer. However, the rear window

washer will run out of fluid before the windshield

washer. If you can wash your windshield but not

your rear window, check your fluid level.

Cruise Control (If Equipped)

With cruise control, you can

maintain a speed of about

25 mph (40 km/h) or more

without keeping your foot

on the accelerator. This can

really help on long trips.

Cruise control does not

work at speeds below

about 25 mph (40 km/h).

If you have an automatic transmission and you apply

your brakes, the cruise control will shut off.

If you have a manual transmission and you apply

your brakes or push the clutch pedal, the cruise control

will shut off.

2-51

CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous where

you can’t drive safely at a steady speed.

So, don’t use your cruise control on

winding roads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous on

slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes

in tire traction can cause needless wheel

spinning, and you could lose control.

Don’t use cruise control on slippery roads.

Setting Cruise Control

CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control switch on when

you’re not using cruise, you might hit a button

and go into cruise when you don’t want to.

You could be startled and even lose control.

Keep the cruise control switch off until you

want to use cruise control.

1. Move the cruise control switch to ON.

2. Get up to the speed you want.

3. Press in the SET button at the end of the lever

and release it.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

Resuming a Set Speed

Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed

and then you apply the brake. This, of course, shuts off

the cruise control. But you don’t need to reset it.

Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,

you can move the cruise control switch briefly from

ON to R/A.

You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and

stay there.

If you hold the switch at R/A, the vehicle will keep

going faster until you release the switch or apply the

brake. So unless you want to go faster, don’t hold the

switch at R/A.

2-52

Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control

There are two ways to go to a higher speed:

Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed.

Press the button at the end of the lever, then release

the button and the accelerator pedal. You’ll now

cruise at the higher speed.

Move the cruise switch from ON to R/A. Hold it

there until you get up to the speed you want, and

then release the switch. To increase your speed in

very small amounts, move the switch briefly to R/A.

Each time you do this, your vehicle will go about

1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.

Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control

Press in the SET button at the end of the lever until

you reach the lower speed you want, then release it.

To slow down in very small amounts, press the SET

button briefly. Each time you do this, you’ll go about

1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When

you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will slow

down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well your cruise control will work on hills depends

upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills.

When going up steep hills, you may want to step on the

accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going

downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear

to keep your speed down. Of course, applying the brake

takes you out of cruise control. Many drivers find this to

be too much trouble and don’t use cruise control on

steep hills.

Ending Cruise Control

There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:

Step lightly on the brake pedal or push the clutch

pedal, if you have a manual transmission.

Move the cruise switch to OFF.

Erasing Speed Memory

When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,

your cruise control set speed memory is erased.

2-53

Exterior Lamps

The parking lamp and headlamp knob is on the driver’s

side of the instrument panel.

Turn the knob clockwise to the parking lamps symbol to

manually turn on the following:

Parking Lamps

Sidemarker Lamps

Taillamps

License Plate Lamps

Instrument Panel Lights

Turn the knob clockwise to the master lamps symbol

to turn on all the lamps listed as well as the headlamps.

Turn the knob all the way counterclockwise to turn off the

lamps and put the system in automatic headlamp mode.

Automatic Headlamp System

When it is dark enough outside, your automatic

headlamp system will turn on your headlamps at the

normal brightness along with other lamps such as the

taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps and the instrument

panel lights. The radio lights will also be dim.

Your vehicle is equipped with a light sensor on the top

of the instrument panel under the radio speaker grill.

Be sure it is not covered or the system will be on

whenever the ignition is on.

The system may also turn on your headlamps when

driving through a parking garage, heavy overcast

weather or a tunnel. This is normal.

There is a delay in the transition between the daytime

and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running Lamps

(DRL) and the automatic headlamp systems so that

driving under bridges or bright overhead street lights does

not affect the system. The DRL and automatic headlamp

system will only be affected when the light sensor sees a

change in lighting lasting longer than the delay.

2-54

To idle your vehicle with the automatic headlamp

system off, set the parking brake while the ignition is

off. Then start your vehicle. The automatic headlamp

system will stay off until you release the parking brake.

As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular

headlamp system when you need it.

You may be able to turn off your automatic headlamp

system. See “Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)” later

in this section for more information

Lamps On Reminder

A reminder chime will sound when your headlamps or

parking lamps are manually turned on, the driver’s

door is opened and your ignition is in OFF, LOCK or

ACCESSORY. To turn the chime off, turn the knob all

the way to the left or turn the instrument panel dimmer

down to the fully dimmed position. In the automatic

mode, the headlamps turn off once the ignition key is

in OFF.

Daytime Running Lamps

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier

for others to see the front of your vehicle during

the day. DRL can be helpful in many different

driving conditions, but they can be especially helpful

in the short periods after dawn and before sunset.

Fully functional daytime running lights are required

on all vehicles first sold in Canada.

The DRL system will make your headlamps come on at

reduced brightness when the following conditions are met:

The ignition is on,

the headlamp switch is in automatic headlamp mode,

the sensor detects daytime light,

an automatic transmission is not in PARK (P), and

the parking brake is released.

When the DRL are on, only your headlamps will be on.

The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps won’t be on.

The instrument panel won’t be lit up either.

When it begins to get dark, the headlamps will

automatically switch from DRL to the regular headlamps.

2-55

The DRL system on some vehicles may turn off

temporarily while the turn signals are activated.

To idle an automatic transmission vehicle with the

DRL off, put the transmission in PARK (P). To idle a

manual transmission vehicle with the DRL off, set the

parking brake. The DRL will stay off until you shift out

of PARK (P) or release the parking brake.

The following does not apply to vehicles sold in Canada.

When necessary, you may turn off the automatic

headlamp system and the Daytime Running Lamps

(DRL) feature by following the steps below:

1. Turn the ignition to RUN.

2. Press the DOME OVERRIDE button four times

within six seconds. After the fourth press of the

button, a chime will sound informing you that the

system is off. The system will revert back to the

automatic on mode when the ignition is turned to

OFF and then to RUN again.

3. To return to the automatic mode, push the DOME

OVERRIDE button four times within six seconds

(a chime will sound), or turn the ignition to OFF

and then to RUN again.

As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular

headlamp system when you need it.

Fog Lamps (If Equipped)

Use your fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty

conditions. Your parking lamps must be on for your

fog lamps to work.

The fog lamp switch is located on the instrument panel

under the lamp switch. Press the switch to turn the

fog lamps on. Press the switch again to turn them off.

A light will glow in the switch when the fog lamps are on.

Fog lamps will go off whenever your high-beam

headlamps come on. When the high beams go off,

the fog lamps will come on again.

2-56

Interior Lamps

Brightness Control

Turn the thumbwheel next to the headlamp knob up

to make your instrument panel lights brighter. Turn the

thumbwheel all the way up to turn on the interior lamps.

Illuminated Entry

Your vehicle is equipped with an illuminated entry feature.

When a door is opened, the dome lamps will come on if

the DOME OVERRIDE button is in the “out” position.

When the doors are closed, or the front door handles

are lifted and released, the lamps will stay on for a short

period of time and will turn off automatically. If you use

your keyless entry transmitter (if equipped) to unlock

your vehicle, the interior lamps will come on for a short

time whether or not the DOME OVERRIDE button is in

the “out” position.

Exit Lighting

With exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on when

you remove the key from the ignition to help you see

while exiting the vehicle. If the DOME OVERRIDE

button is in the “out” position, these lamps will

stay on for a short period of time and then will go out.

Front Reading Lamps (If Equipped)

Press the button located near each lamp on the overhead

console to turn a reading lamp on and off. The lamps

can be swiveled to point in the desired direction.

If you have the mini console, press the lens on each

lamp to turn it on or off.

2-57

Front Map Lamps (If Equipped)

If your vehicle has front map lamps, they are located

on the inside rearview mirror. They will automatically

come on for approximately 40 seconds when the

doors are unlocked with the keyless entry transmitter

(if equipped) or until the ignition key is turned to

RUN or ACCESSORY. The lamps will also stay on

for approximately 40 seconds after you exit the

vehicle unless you lock the doors with the keyless

entry transmitter.

You can also turn the lamps on and off by pressing the

switch near each lamp.

Dome Lamps

The dome lamps will come on when you open a door.

You can also turn the dome lamps on by turning the

thumbwheel, located next to the parking/headlamps

knob, all the way up to the top detent position. In this

position, the dome lamps will remain on until they are

turned off.

You can use the DOME OVERRIDE button, located

below the parking/headlamp knob, to set the dome

lamps to come on automatically when a door is opened,

or to remain off. To turn the lamps off, press the button

into the “in” position. With the button in this position,

the dome lamps will remain off when a door is open.

To return the lamps to automatic operation, press the

button again and return it to the “out” position.

With the button in this position, the dome lamps will

come on when you open a door. This will override the

illuminated entry feature, unless you use your keyless

entry transmitter (if equipped) to unlock the vehicle.

Battery Run-Down Protection

This feature shuts off the dome, courtesy, vanity,

reading, glove box and underhood lamps if they are left

on for more than 20 minutes when the ignition is off.

This will keep your battery from running down.

If the battery run-down protection shuts off the interior

lamps, it may be necessary to do one of the following to

return to normal operation:

Shut off all lamps and close all doors, or

turn the ignition key to RUN.

2-58

Mirrors

Inside Day/Night Rearview Mirror

Pull the tab under the mirror toward you to reduce glare

from headlamps behind you after dark. Push the tab

away from you for normal daytime operation.

Electrochromic Day/Night Inside Rearview

Mirror (If Equipped)

This mirror automatically changes to reduce glare from

headlamps behind you. A photocell on the back of

the mirror senses when it is becoming dark outside.

Another photocell built into the mirror surface senses

when headlamps are behind you.

2-59

At night, when the glare is too high, the mirror will

gradually darken to reduce glare (this change may take a

few seconds). The mirror will return to its clear daytime

state when the glare is reduced. The mirror will also

return to its clear daytime state when the vehicle is put

into REVERSE (R).

Press the AUTO button at the base of the mirror to turn

on the automatic feature. The button has an indicator

light to show it is on. Press the OFF button to turn the

automatic feature off.

Time Delay

The automatic mirror has a time delay feature which

prevents unnecessary switching from the night back to

the day position. This delay prevents rapid changing of

the mirror as you drive under lights and through traffic.

Cleaning the Photocells

Use a cotton swab and glass cleaner to clean the

photocells when necessary.

Electrochromic Day/Night Inside Rearview

Mirror with OnStar (If Equipped)

Your vehicle may be equipped with an electrochromic

day/night rearview mirror with the OnStar system.

This mirror functions exactly as the electrochromic

mirror described previously with the exception of the

three OnStar buttons located at the bottom of the

mirror face and the ON/OFF button to the left of the

OnStar controls. Press the ON/OFF button to turn on

the electrochromic mirror. Press the button again to

turn it off.

See your dealer for more information on subscribing to

OnStar. See “OnStar System” in the Index for more

information on using OnStar.

2-60

Outside Manual Adjust Mirror

Adjust your outside mirrors so you can just see the side

of your vehicle.

You can fold them before entering a car wash. Pull the

mirrors in toward the vehicle. Push the mirrors back out

when finished.

Power Remote Control Mirrors (If Equipped)

These controls are located

on the driver’s door armrest.

Move the upper control to the left or right to choose the

driver’s or passenger’s mirror, then press the arrows on

the lower control to adjust the mirror in the direction

you want the mirror to go.

Convex Outside Mirror

A convex mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more

from the driver’s seat.

CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (like other

vehicles) look farther away than they really are.

If you cut too sharply into the right or left lane,

you could hit a vehicle. Check your inside mirror

or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.

Electrochromic Outside Rearview Mirror

(If Equipped)

Only the driver’s side outside mirror will adjust for the

glare of headlamps behind you. See “Electrochromic

Day/Night Inside Rearview Mirror” earlier in this section.

2-61

Heated Outside Rearview Mirrors

(If Equipped)

When you operate the rear window defogger, a defogger

also warms the heated outside rearview mirrors to help

clear them of ice, snow and condensation. See “Rear

Window Defogger” in the Index for more information.

Power Folding Mirrors (If Equipped)

Your vehicle may be

equipped with power folding

mirrors. This feature can be

helpful when taking your

vehicle through a car wash

or through narrow spaces.

To fold the mirrors in, press the blank side of the switch

located on the driver’s side door panel near the window.

To have the mirrors return to their normal position, press

the side of the switch with the graphic on it. The switch

will stay on in which ever position it is placed.

If at any time your mirrors become disengaged, fold the

mirrors out manually and then use the switch to fold the

mirrors in and out. This will assure that the power fold

unit in your mirrors is properly engaged.

Storage Compartments

Glove Box

To open your glove box, lift the lever on the front of the

glove box and lower the door. The glove box should not

be open while you are driving.

2-62

Overhead Console (If Equipped)

The overhead console includes reading lamps, a

compartment for a garage door opener, a temperature and

compass display and a storage compartment for sunglasses.

Some models have a driver information system in the

console. See “Driver Information System” later in

this section.

Reading Lamps

Press the button near each

lamp to turn the reading

lamps on and off.

The lamps can also be swiveled to point in the

desired direction.

2-63

Installing a Garage Door Opener

If you have a garage door opener, the front overhead

compartment can be used to conveniently store

the opener.

If you have the optional HomeLink Transmitter,

please see “HomeLink Transmitter” in the Index

for instructions on how to use the system.

To install the garage door opener, first open the

compartment door by pressing the latch forward.

Peel the protective

backing from the hook

and loop patch.

Press it firmly to the back of your garage door opener,

as close to the center of the opener as possible.

Center the garage door opener activation button over

the console door button and press the opener firmly

into place.

The pegs inside the

compartment door are used

to make sure the button on

the compartment door will

contact the control button

on the garage door opener.

Add one peg at a time until the garage door opener

operates with the compartment door closed when you

press the button.

2-64

Now, with the compartment

door closed, press the

button again to make sure

the garage door opener

operates properly.

With the garage door opener positioned properly and

the right number of pegs in place, you should only

have to press the button slightly to operate the opener.

Adjust the position of the garage door opener and

add or remove pegs, as needed, until the opener

operates properly.

Temperature and Compass Display

The outside air temperature and the compass are

displayed at the front of the overhead console.

The control buttons are located to the left of the display.

2-65

Turn the display on or off by pressing the ON/OFF

button. Display the temperature in either degrees

Fahrenheit (English) or Celsius (metric) by pressing

the US/MET button.

Before you turn on the ignition and move the vehicle,

the temperature indicated will be the last outside

temperature recorded with the ignition on.

If the outside temperature is 37 F (3 C) or lower

when you turn on the ignition, “ICE” will appear

on the display. This is a warning to the driver that road

conditions may be icy, and that appropriate precautions

should be taken.

The compass is self-calibrating, so it does not need to

be manually set. However, when your vehicle is new,

the compass may function erratically. If it does, “CAL”

(Calibration) will appear on the display. To correct the

problem, drive in a complete 360 degree circle three

times, and the compass will function normally.

Variance is the difference between magnetic north and

geographic north. In some areas, the difference between

the two can be great enough to cause false compass

readings. If this happens, follow these instructions to

set the variance for your particular location:

1. Find your location on the zone map. Record your

zone number.

2. Press and hold both the ON/OFF and the US/MET

buttons. The display will go off.

2-66

3. After five seconds, VAR CAL will appear on the

display. When it does, release both buttons.

4. Press US/MET until your zone number appears

on the display.

5. Press ON/OFF to enter your zone number.

Your variance is now set.

Driver Information System (If Equipped)

This system displays the outside air temperature,

compass direction and trip information in the

overhead console.

US/MET: The US/MET (United States/metric) button

allows you to switch the display between the English

and metric system.

MODE: The MODE button can be used to toggle

between three modes of operation: OFF, COMP/TEMP

and TRIP.

COMP/TEMP: The display provides the outside

temperature and one of eight compass readings to

indicate the direction the vehicle is facing.

Before you turn on the ignition and move the

vehicle, the temperature indicated will be the last

outside temperature recorded with the ignition on.

If the outside temperature is 37 F (3 C) or lower,

the display will toggle between the word “ICE” and

the current temperature every eight seconds. This is a

warning to the driver that road conditions may be icy,

and that appropriate precautions should be taken.

The compass is self-calibrating, so it does not need

to be manually set. However, if “C” (Calibration) is

displayed, the compass will need to be calibrated.

You may also place the compass in a noncalibrated

mode by pressing and holding the MODE and US/MET

buttons simultaneously while in the COMP/TEMP

mode. After about 10 seconds, the compass will display

“C” and you can release the buttons. Drive the vehicle

in a complete 360 degree circle three times at a speed of

less than 5 mph (8 km/h), and the compass will function

normally. Once the calibration is complete, the display

will return to a compass reading.

2-67

Variance is the difference between magnetic north and

geographic north. In some areas, the difference between

the two can be great enough to cause false compass

readings. If this happens, follow these instructions to

set the variance for your particular location:

1. Find your location on the zone map earlier in this

section. Record your zone number.

2. Press and hold both the MODE and the US/MET

buttons in the COMP/TEMP mode.

3. After five seconds, the compass will acknowledge

the variation mode by displaying the current zone

number. When it does, release both buttons.

4. Press US/MET until your zone number appears

on the display.

5. Press MODE to enter your zone number.

Your variance is now set and the display will

return to the COMP/TEMP mode.

TRIP: Once in the TRIP mode, pressing the

MODE button will step you through the following

TRIP functions:

AVG ECON: The average fuel economy since the

last reset is displayed.

INST ECON: Instantaneous fuel economy for the

last second of driving is displayed.

RANGE: The display indicates the estimated

distance that can be travelled with the remaining fuel

in the tank, based on the fuel economy for the last

few hours of driving.

FUEL USED: The fuel used since the last reset

is displayed.

AVG SPEED: The average speed since the last

reset is displayed.

To reset the trip computer, press the MODE and

US/MET buttons simultaneously for at least two seconds.

All functions will be displayed for half a second once the

system is reset. Reset can only be performed in the

AVG ECON, FUEL USED and AVG SPEED modes.

All three modes are reset simultaneously.

2-68

Sunglasses Storage Compartment

The console has a sunglasses storage compartment.

To open the compartment press the release button.

Then pull the compartment down.

Door Storage

You will find a storage compartment on each of the

front doors.

Four-door models have storage pockets and cupholders

on rear doors.

Front Storage Area (If Equipped)

If your vehicle has this console compartment, squeeze

the front lever while lifting the top to open it. You can

store cassettes and compact discs in the slots in front of

the compartment. There is also a lift-out storage tray

in the console.

Some models will have a console with pop out cup

holders located on the front of the storage compartment.

If your vehicle has this console push in and release on the

cup holder door. The cupholders will pop out for use.

2-69

The console also contains the following components:

Rear Seat Audio Controls

Rear Seat Accessory Power Outlets

Six-disc CD Changer

Cellular Phone (if equipped)

For more information on these components, please see

the Index for that item.

If your vehicle has the center armrest compartment,

lift the cover to expose the storage area which includes

slots for cassettes or compact discs and a coinholder.

Convenience Net (If Equipped)

You may have a convenience net in the rear of your vehicle

to help keep small items, like gloves and light clothing,

in place during sharp turns or quick stops and starts.

The net is not designed to retain these items during

off-road use. The net is not for larger, heavier items.

Attach the upper loops to the retainers on either side

of the endgate/liftgate opening (the label should be in

the upper passenger side corner, visible from the rear

of vehicle). Attach the lower hooks to the rear cargo tie

downs on the floor.

2-70

Cargo Cover (If Equipped)

If your vehicle has a cargo cover, you can use it to cover

items in the cargo area of your vehicle.

Grasp the handle and unroll the cover. Latch the posts

into the sockets on the inside trim panel on the

passenger’s side of the vehicle to secure it.

CAUTION:

An improperly stored cargo cover could be

thrown about the vehicle during a collision

or sudden maneuver. You or others could be

injured. If you remove the cover, always store it

outside of the vehicle. When you put it back,

always be sure that it is securely reattached.

Cargo Tie Downs

There are five cargo tie

downs in the rear of your

vehicle that allow you to

strap cargo in and keep it

from moving.

Rear Convenience System (If Equipped)

CAUTION:

If the convenience system isn’t secured properly,

it can move around in a collision or sudden stop.

People in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure to

secure the convenience system properly.

2-71

The convenience system, located in the rear of your vehicle,

provides a place to store loose items in your vehicle.

A. Collapsible Dividers

B. Anchor Bracket/

Cargo Tie-Down

Plugs

C. Partitions

D. Soda Pop/Gallon

Jug Holder

E. Partition Storage

F. Cargo Tie-Down

Cutouts

To increase the space in the convenience system,

do the following:

1. Remove the individual partitions (C) by pulling

upward on the partitions. Storage for the partitions

is located in area (F).

2. Then fold the collapsible dividers (A) by pulling

upward and folding the dividers toward each other.

To reinstall or rearrange the partitions, push down gently

on the partitions making sure both sides fit into the

appropriate slots of the collapsible dividers (A).

Located on the top of each collapsible divider (A) are

T-pins designed to hold grocery bags, etc., in an

upright position.

The anchor bracket/cargo tie down plugs (B), located in

the center and on each side of the convenience system

nearest the passenger compartment, are used to help seal

the convenience system. However, the plugs also cover

the anchor bracket /cargo tie-downs. To remove the

plugs, grasp the edges of the plugs and pull straight out.

See “Child Restraints” and “Top Strap” in the Index

for more information on using anchor brackets.

2-72

There are two cutouts (E) for the rear cargo tie-downs

located near the liftgate/endgate sill. In order to access

the rear cargo tie-downs, the cutouts must be removed.

You will also find a soda pop/gallon jug holder (D) on

the passenger side of the convenience system. Some

vehicles do not have this feature, but instead include a

smaller storage area.

To remove the entire convenience system,

do the following:

1. Remove the convenience net if it is in place.

See “Convenience Net” in the Index for more

information. You may also want to remove the

partitions (C) and fold the collapsible dividers (A)

to make the convenience system easier to handle.

2. Grasp the sides of the convenience system and push

the sides together while sliding the unit out until it

clears the sides of the liftgate/endgate opening.

To reinstall the convenience system, reverse the

removal procedure.

Luggage Carrier (Option)

CAUTION:

If you try to carry something on top of your

vehicle that is longer or wider than the luggage

carrier -- like paneling, plywood, a mattress,

and so forth -- the wind can catch it as you

drive along. This can cause you to lose control.

What you are carrying could be violently torn

off, and this could cause you or other drivers

to have a collision, and of course damage your

vehicle. You may be able to carry something like

this inside. But, never carry something longer

or wider than the luggage carrier on top of

your vehicle.

The luggage carrier has slats, side rails and crossrails

attached to the roof to secure cargo. The adjustable tie

downs, at either end of the crossrails, should be used to

secure loads to the luggage carrier.

2-73

Use GM accessory racks that are compatible with

your luggage carrier for transporting sports equipment.

These are available through your GM dealer.

You can adjust the crossrails to handle loads of various

sizes. Just loosen the slider knobs at each end of the

crossrail and move them to where you want them.

Make sure both sides of the crossrails are even,

then tighten the slider knobs.

Be sure the cargo is properly loaded.

Follow these guidelines:

Carrying small, heavy loads on the roof is

not recommended.

Tie the load to the tie downs (at either end of

the crossrails). When loading cargo directly on

the roof panel, use the crossrails to keep the load

from shifting.

If you need to carry long items, move the crossrails

as far apart as possible. Tie the load to the tie downs

provided. Also tie the load to the bumpers. Do not

tie the load so tightly that the crossrails or side rails

are damaged.

NOTICE:

Loading cargo that weighs more than 200 lbs.

(91 kg) on the luggage carrier may damage your

vehicle. When you carry large things, never let

them hang over the rear or the sides of your

vehicle. When loading cargo on the roof panel,

be sure it rests on the slats and does not scratch

or damage the vehicle.

Put the cargo against the side rails and fasten it

securely to the luggage carrier. Put the main

weight as far forward as you can and move the

rear crossrail forward as far as possible to keep

the load from shifting.

Don’t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when loading

your vehicle. For more information on vehicle capacity

and loading, see “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index.

To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you’re driving,

check now and then to make sure the luggage carrier and

cargo are still securely fastened.

2-74

Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter

Pull the front ashtray door down to open it.

NOTICE:

Don’t put papers and other things that burn into

your ashtray. If you do, cigarettes or other smoking

materials could set them on fire, causing damage.

To remove the front ashtray, pull the bin upward.

To use the lighter, press it in all the way, and let go.

When it’s ready, it will pop back out by itself.

NOTICE:

Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with your hand

while it is heating. If you do, it won’t be able to

back away from the heating element when it’s

ready. That can make it overload, damaging the

lighter and the heating element.

Sun Visors

To block out glare, you can pull the visor down.

You can also swing the visor from side-to-side.

Visor Vanity Mirror

Pull the sun visor down and lift the cover to expose the

vanity mirror.

Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirror

(If Equipped)

Pull the sun visor down and lift the mirror cover to turn

on the lamps.

2-75

Accessory Inflator (If Equipped)

Your vehicle may be equipped with an air inflator

system. With it, you can inflate things like air mattresses

and basketballs, and you can also use it to bring your

tires up to the proper pressure.

The air inflator is located

in the rear compartment on

the passenger’s side of the

vehicle. To remove the

cover, pull the tab on the

cover and pull it off.

The air inflator kit includes an 18-foot (5.5 m) hose with

three nozzle adapters.

CAUTION:

Inflating something too much can make it explode,

and you or others could be injured. Be sure to read

the inflator instructions, and inflate any object

only to its recommended pressure.

To use your air inflator

attach the appropriate

nozzle adapter, if required,

to the end of the hose.

Then attach that end of

the hose to the object you

wish to inflate. Remove the

protective cap covering the

outlet. Attach the other end

of the hose to the outlet.

Press the ON switch.

If the air inflator system does not turn on, the fuse may

be blown or installed incorrectly. See “Fuses and Circuit

Breakers” in the Index or see your dealer for service.

2-76

Your air inflator will automatically shut off after about

10 minutes. To reset, press the ON switch again.

Don’t run your air inflator for longer than 30 minutes

at one time. If you do, you may damage the system.

After 30 minutes, wait at least 10 minutes before

restarting the air inflator.

To turn off the air inflator, press OFF and detach the

hose, first from the inflated object, then from the outlet.

Replace the protective cap. Place the inflator kit tools in

the pouch and store them properly.

To replace the cover, line up the tabs at the back of the

cover and put it in place.

See your dealer for more information on using the

accessory inflator.

Accessory Power Outlets

With the accessory power outlets, you can plug in

auxiliary electrical equipment. The accessory power

outlets are located near the center of the vehicle on the

lower part of the instrument panel. Just remove the

plug from the outlet and follow the proper installation

instructions that are included with any electrical

equipment you install.

Some vehicles will have a small cover which must be

pulled down to access the accessory power outlets.

These vehicles will also have another power outlet

located in the lower rear of the center console.

Certain accessory power plugs may not be compatible

to the accessory power outlets and could result in blown

vehicle adapter fuses. If you experience a problem see

your dealer for additional information on accessory

power plugs.

These circuits are protected by a fuse and have

maximum current levels.

NOTICE:

Adding some electrical equipment to your vehicle

can damage it or keep other things from working

as they should. This wouldn’t be covered by your

warranty. Check with your dealer before adding

anything that exceeds the fuse rating.

2-77

OnStar System (If Equipped)

OnStar is a vehicle communications system that

offers a variety of services and provides a hands-free

communication link between you and the OnStar Center.

A service subscription agreement and fee are required in

order to receive OnStar service. Services are available

24 hours a day, 7 days a week. For more information,

call 1-888-ONSTAR-7 (1-888-667-8277).

OnStar Services Button: Press this button once

to contact an advisor who will be able to assist you with

these services. If you are not quickly connected, the

system will automatically reset and redial. This ensures

connection to the center; there is no additional action

required. Press the Call Answer/End button to cancel the

automatic redial.

Emergency Button: In an emergency situation,

press the emergency service button. Upon receiving the

call, an advisor at the center will locate your vehicle and

assess the situation. If necessary, the advisor will alert

the nearest emergency service provider.

Call ANSWER/END Button: Use this button

to answer a call. (If you are receiving a call, the audio

system will mute, and the ring will be heard). Press this

button at the end of a call to disconnect and return the

audio system to its previous settings. This button will

also cancel a call if one of the buttons is accidentally

pressed or if the automatic redial function is activated.

Volume Control: You can control the volume of the

OnStar System using either the volume control knob

on the radio or using the steering wheel volume control

(if equipped).

Telltale Light: This light will indicate the status of the

system. A solid green light will come on when you start

the vehicle to let you know that the system is on and is

ready to make or receive calls.

If the light blinks green it means that an incoming

or outgoing call is in progress. Press the Call

ANSWER/END button if you notice the light

blinking and you are not on a call.

2-78

The light will be red in the event of an OnStar system

malfunction. If this occurs press the OnStar button to

attempt to contact an advisor. If the connection is made,

the advisor will assist you with steps to take to make

sure that the system is functioning properly. If you

cannot contact the advisor, take your vehicle to your

dealership as soon as possible for assistance.

Safety and Security Services

Automatic Notification of Air Bag

Deployment -- If an air bag deploys, a priority

emergency signal is automatically sent to the center.

An advisor will locate your vehicle’s position, try to

contact you and assist you in the situation. If the

center is unable to contact you, an emergency service

provider will be contacted.

Stolen Vehicle Tracking -- Call the center at

1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) to report your

vehicle stolen. The system can then locate and track

your vehicle and the advisor will be able to notify

the proper authorities.

Roadside Assistance with Location -- For vehicle

breakdowns, press the OnStar button. An advisor

will contact the appropriate help.

Remote Diagnostics -- If an instrument panel light

comes on, the center can perform a check of the

engine on-board computer. An advisor can then

recommend what action needs to be taken.

OnStar MED-NET -- Med-Net can store your

personal medical history and provide it to emergency

personnel if necessary.

Accident Assist -- An advisor can provide

step-by-step guidance following an accident.

Remote Door Unlock -- To contact the center,

call 1-888-4-ONSTAR. You will be required to

provide your security information. An advisor will

send a command to your vehicle to unlock itself.

The advisor can delay unlocking your vehicle.

Remote Door Unlock is disabled 48 hours after

the vehicle is parked to maintain the battery charge.

Vehicle Locator Service -- To contact the center,

call 1-888-4-ONSTAR. You will be required to

provide your security information. An advisor will

send a command to your vehicle to sound the horn

and/or flash the lamps.

In order to provide you with excellent service, calls with

the OnStar Center may be monitored or recorded.

2-79

Premium Services (Includes Safety and

Security Services)

Route Support -- An advisor can provide directions

or guidance to anywhere you want to go. In addition,

they can help you locate gas stations, rest areas,

ATMs, hospitals, hotels, stores, eateries and more.

Concierge Services -- The concierge advisor can

obtain tickets, reservations, or help with vacation/trip

planning and other unique items and services.

Ride Assist -- An advisor can locate transportation

in the event that you are unable to drive.

OnStar System Limitations

Complete limitations can be found on the Subscriber

Services Agreement.

OnStar Service is:

available in the 48 contiguous United States, Alaska,

Hawaii and Canada;

available when the vehicle is within the operating

range of a cellular provider;

subject to limitations caused by atmospheric

conditions, such as severe weather or topographical

conditions, such as mountainous terrain;

subject to cellular carrier equipment limitations.

Global positioning capabilities used to deliver

OnStar Service will not be available if satellite

signals are obstructed.

OnStar will not function if the vehicle’s battery is

discharged or disconnected. It may also be inoperative

if the vehicle is in an accident and the OnStar or vehicle

electrical system components are damaged.

Safety and security services are provided by existing

governmental emergency service providers. OnStar

will use reasonable efforts to contact the appropriate

emergency service provider and request assistance but

cannot promise that they will respond to the call in a

timely manner or at all.

2-80

Sunroof (If Equipped)

Your vehicle may be equipped with a power sliding sunroof.

To open or close your sunroof, the ignition needs to be in

RUN or ACCESSORY or Retained Accessory Power

(RAP) needs to be active. See “Retained Accessory Power”

in the Index.

Press and release the rear side of the button in the mini

console to open the sunroof.

You can press the forward side of the button to close

the sunroof. Once the sunroof is closed, press the

forward side of the button to open the sunroof to the

vent position.

The sunroof is also equipped with a sunshade which you

can pull forward to block sun rays.

HomeLink Transmitter

(If Equipped)

Mini Console

2-81

Full-Size Console

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause harmful interference,

and (2) this device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired operation.

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference, including interference

that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Changes and modifications to this system by other than

an authorized service facility could void authorization to

use this equipment.

Programming the Transmitter

Do not use the HomeLink Transmitter with any garage

door opener that does not have the “stop and reverse”

feature. This includes any garage door opener model

manufactured before April 1, 1982.

Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage

door you are programming.

Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while

programming the transmitter. Follow these steps to

program up to three channels:

1. If you have previously programmed a transmitter

channel, proceed to Step 2. Otherwise, hold

down the two outside buttons on the HomeLink

Transmitter until the indicator light begins to flash

rapidly (after 20 seconds). Then release the buttons.

This procedure initializes the memory and erases any

previous settings for all three channels.

2. Decide which one of the three channels you want to

program. Hold the end of the hand-held transmitter

about 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the

surface of the HomeLink Transmitter so that you

can still see the indicator light.

2-82

3. Using both hands, press the hand-held transmitter

button and the desired button on the HomeLink

Transmitter. Continue to press both buttons

through Step 4.

4. Hold down both buttons until you see the red

light on the HomeLink Transmitter flash rapidly.

The rapid flashing indicates that the HomeLink

Transmitter has been programmed. Release both

buttons once the light starts to flash rapidly.

If you have trouble programming the HomeLink

Transmitter, make sure that you have followed the

directions exactly as described and that the battery in the

hand-held transmitter is not dead. If you still cannot

program it, turn the hand-held transmitter end over end

and try again. The HomeLink Transmitter may not work

with older garage door openers that do not meet current

Federal Consumer Safety Standards. If you cannot

program the transmitter after repeated attempts, refer to

“Training a Garage Door Opener with Rolling Codes”

later in this section or contact the manufacturer of the

unit at 1-800-355-3515.

Be sure to keep the original hand-held transmitter

in case you need to erase and reprogram the

HomeLink Transmitter.

Canadian Owners: During programming,

the hand-held transmitter may automatically stop

transmitting after one or two seconds. In this case, you

should press and re-press the button on the hand-held

transmitter every two seconds without ever releasing the

button on the HomeLink Transmitter. Release both

buttons when the indicator light on the HomeLink

Transmitter begins to flash rapidly.

Operating the Transmitter

Press and hold the appropriate button on the

HomeLink Transmitter. The indicator light comes on

while the signal is being transmitted.

If the hand-held transmitter appears to program the

HomeLink Transmitter but does not open your garage

door, and if the garage door opener was manufactured

after 1996, the garage door opener may have a “rolling

code” system. A rolling code system changes the code

of the garage door opener every time you open or close

the garage door.

To determine if you have this system, press the button on the

HomeLink Transmitter that you have programmed already.

If the indicator light flashes rapidly for one or two seconds,

then turns solid, the garage door opener has a rolling code

system. In a rolling code system, the garage door motor

head unit must be trained to the HomeLink Transmitter.

2-83

Training a Garage Door Opener with a

“Rolling Code” Feature (If Equipped)

If you have not previously programmed the

hand-held transmitter to the HomeLink Transmitter,

see “Programming the Transmitter” listed previously.

If you have completed this programming already, you

now need to train the garage door opener motor head

unit to recognize the HomeLink Transmitter. Refer to

your garage door opener owner’s manual for the proper

transmitter training procedure for your garage door

opener brand.

1. Find the training button on the garage door opener

motor head unit. The exact location and color will

vary by garage door opener brand. If you have

difficulty finding the training button, refer to your

garage door opener owner’s manual.

Because of the steps involved, it may be helpful to

have another person available to assist you in

programming the transmitter.

2. Press the training button on the garage door opener

motor head unit. An indicator light will begin to flash

when the motor head unit enters the training mode.

Following this step, you have 30 seconds to start Step 3.

3. Return to the HomeLink Transmitter in your

vehicle and firmly press and release the HomeLink

Transmitter button you have already programmed for

two or three seconds. Press and release the button

again (you may need to do this step up to three times)

to make sure that the HomeLink Transmitter has been

trained to the garage door opener motor head unit.

Check that the training was successful. The motor

head unit indicator light should no longer be flashing.

The garage door opener should now recognize the

HomeLink Transmitter. You may either use the

HomeLink Transmitter or the hand-held transmitter

to open the garage door.

If after following these instructions, you still have

problems training the garage door opener, call the

manufacturer of the unit at 1-800-355-3515.

Erasing Channels

To erase all three programmed channels, hold down the

two outside buttons until the indicator light begins to

flash (after 20 seconds). Release both buttons.

Accessories

Accessories for the HomeLink Transmitter are available

from the manufacturer of the unit. If you would like

additional information, please call 1-800-355-3515.

2-84

The Instrument Panel--Your Information System

2-85

The main components of your instrument panel are the following:

A. Air Vents

B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

C. Instrument Panel Cluster

D. Transfer Case Controls (If Equipped)

E. Lamp Controls

F. Fog Lamps (if equipped)

G. Brake Release

H. Audio Steering Controls (If Equipped)

I. Rear Window Washer/Wiper

J. Rear Liftgate/Endgate Release

K. Comfort Controls

L. Rear Window Defogger

M. Audio System

N. Glove Box

2-86

Instrument Panel Cluster

Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how fast

you’re going, about how much fuel you’ve used, and many other things you’ll need to know to drive safely and economically.

Standard Automatic Transmission Cluster, Canada similar

2-87

Optional Automatic Transmission Cluster, Canada similar

2-88

Speedometer and Odometer

Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles

per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).

Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has been

driven, in either miles (used in the United States) or

kilometers (used in Canada).

The odometer mileage can be checked without the

vehicle running. Simply press the trip odometer button.

You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a

new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to

the mileage total of the old odometer, then it must be.

But if it can’t, then it’s set at zero, and a label must be

put on the driver’s door to show the old mileage reading

when the new odometer was installed.

Trip Odometer

The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has

been driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero.

To view the trip odometer, press the button near the

readout. To reset the trip odometer, hold the button

until it resets.

Tachometer (If Equipped)

The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions

per minute (rpm).

NOTICE:

On vehicles with a manual transmission, if you

operate the engine with the tachometer in the

shaded warning areas, your vehicle’s engine or

other parts of your vehicle could be damaged.

Damage to your engine or vehicle caused by

operating the engine with the tachometer in

the shaded warning areas isn’t covered by your

vehicle warranty. Don’t operate the tachometer

in the shaded warning areas.

2-89

Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators

This part describes the warning lights and gages that

may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you

locate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal that something is

wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an

expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to

your warning lights and gages could also save you or

others from injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be or is a

problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you

will see in the details on the next few pages, some

warning lights come on briefly when you start the

engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are

familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed

when this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem

with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and

warning lights work together to let you know when

there’s a problem with your vehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on

when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows

there may be a problem, check the section that tells you

what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.

Waiting to do repairs can be costly -- and even

dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights

and gages. They’re a big help.

Safety Belt Reminder Light

When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will

come on for about eight seconds to remind people to

fasten their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is

already buckled.

The safety belt light will

also come on and stay on

for about 20 seconds,

then it will flash for

about 55 seconds.

If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the chime

nor the light will come on.

2-90

Air Bag Readiness Light

There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument

panel, which shows the air bag symbol. The system

checks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions.

The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.

The system check includes the air bag sensors, the

air bag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and

diagnostic module. For more information on the air bag

system, see “Air Bag” in the Index.

This light will come on

when you start your vehicle,

and it will flash for a few

seconds. Then the light

should go out. This means

the system is ready.

If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the

vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your air bag

system may not work properly. Have your vehicle

serviced right away.

CAUTION:

If the air bag readiness light stays on after you

start your vehicle, it means the air bag system

may not be working properly. The air bags in

your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they

could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid

injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle

serviced right away if the air bag readiness light

stays on after you start your vehicle.

The air bag readiness light should flash for a few

seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN.

If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so

it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

2-91

Charging System Indicator Light

The charging system light

will come on briefly when

you turn on the ignition,

but the engine is not

running, as a check to

show you it is working.

It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays

on, or comes on while you are driving, you may have a

problem with the charging system. It could indicate

that you have problems with a generator drive belt, or

another electrical problem. Have it checked right away.

Driving while this light is on could drain your battery.

If you must drive a short distance with the light on,

be certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the

radio and air conditioner.

Voltmeter Gage

When your engine is not

running, but the ignition

is on (in RUN), this gage

shows your battery’s state

of charge in DC volts.

When the engine is running, the gage shows the

condition of the charging system. Readings between

the low and high warning zones indicate the normal

operating range.

Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a

large number of electrical accessories are operating in

the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an

extended period. This condition is normal since the

charging system is not able to provide full power

at engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this

condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds

allow the charging system to create maximum power.

2-92

You can only drive for a short time with the reading in

either warning zone. If you must drive, turn off all

unnecessary accessories.

Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible

problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle

serviced as soon as possible.

Shift Light

You have the shift light

on the instrument panel

cluster if you have a

manual transmission.

Shifting when the indicator light is on will help you get

the best fuel economy. See “Shift Light” in the Index.

Brake System Warning Light

When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light

will come on when you set your parking brake. The light

will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release fully.

If it stays on after your parking brake is fully released,

it means you have a brake problem.

Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into

two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can

still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you

need both parts working well.

If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake

problem. Have your brake system inspected right away.

United States Canada

2-93

This light should come on briefly when you turn the

ignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then,

have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s

a problem.

If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the

road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is

harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the floor.

It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the

vehicle towed for service. See “Towing Your Vehicle” in

the Index.

CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be working properly

if the brake system warning light is on. Driving

with the brake system warning light on can lead

to an accident. If the light is still on after you’ve

pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have

the vehicle towed for service.

Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light

With the anti-lock brake

system, this light will

come on when you start

your engine and may stay

on for several seconds.

That’s normal.

If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving,

your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system

warning light isn’t on, you still have brakes, but you

don’t have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system

warning light is also on, you don’t have anti-lock

brakes and there’s a problem with your regular brakes.

See “Brake System Warning Light” earlier in

this section.

The anti-lock brake system warning light should

come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN.

If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will

be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

2-94

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

United States Canada

This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.

If the gage pointer moves into the red area, your engine

is too hot!

It means that your engine coolant has overheated.

If you have been operating your vehicle under normal

driving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop

your vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.

See “Engine Overheating” in the Index for

more information.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

(Service Engine Soon Light in the United

States or Check Engine Light in Canada)

United States Canada

Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which

monitors operation of the fuel, ignition and emission

control systems.

This system is called OBD II (On-Board

Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to

assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life

of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment.

The SERVICE ENGINE SOON or CHECK ENGINE

light comes on to indicate that there is a problem and

service is required. Malfunctions often will be indicated

by the system before any problem is apparent. This may

prevent more serious damage to your vehicle. This system

is also designed to assist your service technician in correctly

diagnosing any malfunction.

2-95

NOTICE:

If you keep driving your vehicle with this light

on, after a while, your emission controls may not

work as well, your fuel economy may not be as

good and your engine may not run as smoothly.

This could lead to costly repairs that may not be

covered by your warranty.

NOTICE:

Modifications made to the engine, transmission,

exhaust, intake or fuel system of your vehicle or

the replacement of the original tires with other

than those of the same Tire Performance Criteria

(TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission controls

and may cause the SERVICE ENGINE SOON

OR CHECK ENGINE light to come on.

Modifications to these systems could lead to

costly repairs not covered by your warranty.

This may also result in a failure to pass a

required Emission Inspection/Maintenance test.

This light should come on, as a check to show you it is

working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not

running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it repaired.

This light will also come on during a malfunction in one

of two ways:

Light Flashing -- A misfire condition has been

detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and

may damage the emission control system on your

vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis

and service may be required.

Light On Steady -- An emission control

system malfunction has been detected on your

vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis

and service may be required.

If the Light Is Flashing

The following may prevent more serious damage to

your vehicle:

Reducing vehicle speed.

Avoiding hard accelerations.

Avoiding steep uphill grades.

If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of

cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,

see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.

2-96

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,

stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.

Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the

engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the Light

Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,

follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle to your

dealer or qualified service center for service.

If the Light Is On Steady

You may be able to correct the emission system

malfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully

install the cap. See “Filling Your Tank” in the Index.

The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap

has been left off or improperly installed. A loose or

missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the

atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap properly

installed should turn the light off.

Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?

If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition

will usually be corrected when the electrical system

dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.

See “Fuel” in the Index. Poor fuel quality will cause

your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.

You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling

when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation

on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These

conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)

This will be detected by the system and cause the light

to turn on.

If you experience one or more of these conditions,

change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least

one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.

If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,

have your dealer or qualified service center check the

vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and

diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical

problems that may have developed.

2-97

Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs

Some state/provincial and local governments have or may

begin programs to inspect the emission control equipment

on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could

prevent you from getting a vehicle registration.

Here are some things you need to know in order to help

your vehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the

SERVICE ENGINE SOON or CHECK ENGINE

light is on or not working properly.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD

(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical

emission control systems have not been completely

diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be

considered not ready for inspection. This can happen

if you have recently replaced your battery or if your

battery has run down. The diagnostic system is designed

to evaluate critical emission control systems during

normal driving. This may take several days of routine

driving. If you have done this and your vehicle still

does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD system

readiness, see your dealer or qualified service center to

prepare the vehicle for inspection.

Oil Pressure Gage

United States Canada

The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in

psi (pounds per square inch) when the engine is running.

Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in kPa (kilopascals).

CAUTION:

Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure is low.

If you do, your engine can become so hot that

it catches fire. You or others could be burned.

Check your oil as soon as possible and have

your vehicle serviced.

2-98

NOTICE:

Damage to your engine from neglected oil problems

can be costly and is not covered by your warranty.

Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside

temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the

low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.

A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a

dangerously low oil level or other problems causing low

oil pressure.

Security Light

This light will come on

briefly when you turn

the key toward START.

The light will stay on

until the engine starts.

If the light flashes, the Passlock system has entered a

tamper mode. If the vehicle fails to start, see “Passlock”

in the Index.

If the light comes on continuously while driving and

stays on, there may be a problem with the Passlock

system. Your vehicle will not be protected by Passlock,

and you should see your dealer.

Also, see “Content Theft-Deterrent” in the Index for

additional information regarding the SECURITY light.

Service Four-Wheel-Drive Warning Light

(If Equipped)

This light should come on

briefly when you turn on

the ignition, as a check to

show you it is working.

The SERVICE 4WD light comes on to indicate that

there may be a problem with the drive system and

service is required. Malfunctions can be indicated by the

system before any problem is apparent, which may

prevent serious damage to the vehicle. This system is

also designed to assist your service technician in

correctly diagnosing a malfunction.

2-99

Tow/Haul Mode Light (If Equipped)

This light should come on

when the tow/haul mode

has been selected.

For more information, see “Tow/Haul Mode” in

the Index.

Check Gages Light

The CHECK GAGES light

will come on briefly when

you are starting the engine.

If the light comes on and stays on while you are driving,

check your coolant temperature and engine oil pressure

gages to see if they are in the warning zones.

Gate Ajar Light

If this light comes on, your

liftgate or liftglass is ajar.

Try closing the liftgate or

liftglass again. Never drive

with the liftgate or liftglass

even partially open.

Fuel Gage

United States Canada

When the ignition is on, the fuel gage tells you about

how much fuel you have remaining.

2-100

Here are four things that some owners ask about.

None of these show a problem with your fuel gage:

At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before

the gage reads full.

It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the

gage indicated. For example, the gage may have

indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a

little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to fill

the tank.

The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or

speed up.

The gage doesn’t go back to empty when you turn

off the ignition.

Low Fuel Light

The LOW FUEL light will

come on briefly when you

are starting the engine.

This light comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel.

To turn it off, add fuel to the fuel tank. See “Fuel” in

the Index.

3- 3-1

Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems

In this section, you’ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle.

Be sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle.

3-2 Comfort Controls

3-2 Standard Climate Control System

3-3 Electronic Climate Control System

(If Equipped)

3-7 Air Conditioning

3-7 Heating

3-7 Defogging and Defrosting

3-8 Rear Window Defogger (If Equipped)

3-9 Ventilation System

3-10 Audio Systems

3-10 Setting the Clock for Systems with SET Button

3-10 Setting the Clock for Systems with HR and

MN Buttons

3-11 AM-FM Stereo

3-13 AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player

(If Equipped)

3-15 AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player and

Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)

3-20 AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player

(Bose ) (If Equipped)

3-25 AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player and

Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)

3-29 AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player

(Bose ) (If Equipped)

3-33 Remote Cassette Tape Player (If Equipped)

3-34 Rear Seat Audio (RSA) (If Equipped)

3-38 Console-Mounted CD Changer (If Equipped)

3-42 Theft-Deterrent Feature (If Equipped)

3-44 Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped)

3-45 Understanding Radio Reception

3-45 Tips About Your Audio System

3-46 Care of Your Cassette Tape Player

3-48 Care of Your Compact Discs

3-48 Care of Your Compact Disc Player

3-48 Fixed Mast Antenna

3-2

Comfort Controls

With this system, you can control the heating, cooling

and ventilation in your vehicle.

Standard Climate Control System

Fan Knob

The knob on the left side of the heating system control panel

controls the fan speed. To increase airflow, move the knob

clockwise. To decrease airflow, move it counterclockwise.

Temperature Knob

The middle knob on the control panel lets you select the

relative temperature of the air flowing into the passenger

area of your vehicle. Move the knob clockwise

toward the red area for warmer air. Move the knob

counterclockwise toward the blue area for cooler air.

Mode Knob

The right knob on the control panel allows you to

choose the direction of air delivery.

OFF: This setting turns the system off. Some outside

air will still enter the vehicle whenever the vehicle is

moving forward. If outside air entering the vehicle is

warmer than desired, turn the temperature knob fully

counterclockwise and turn the mode knob to VENT.

MAX A/C: This setting provides maximum cooling

with the least amount of work. MAX A/C recirculates

much of the air inside your vehicle so it cools quickly.

This setting directs most of the air through the

instrument panel vents and a small amount through

the floor vents.

3-3

A/C: This setting cools the air entering your vehicle

and directs most of the air through the instrument panel

vents and a small amount through the floor vents.

BI-LEVEL A/C: This setting cools the air

entering your vehicle and directs it through the heater

floor outlets as well as the instrument panel outlets.

VENT: This setting directs most of the air through

the instrument panel outlets and a small amount through

the floor outlets. The air conditioning compressor is not

working when VENT is selected.

HEATER: This setting directs most of the

warmed air through the heater floor outlets and some

air through the windshield defroster outlets.

BLEND: This setting divides the airflow equally

between the heater floor outlets and the windshield

defroster outlets.

DEFROST: This setting directs most air through

the windshield defroster outlets and some through the

heater (floor) outlets.

Electronic Climate Control System

(If Equipped)

Fan Knob

The knob on the left side of the electronic climate

control panel controls the fan speed. To manually

increase airflow, move the knob clockwise. To manually

decrease airflow, move it counterclockwise.

OFF: If the knob is in OFF, outside air will still enter

the vehicle, and will be directed based on the position of

the mode knob.

AUTO: If the knob is in AUTO, the fan speed will

vary as the system maintains the selected temperature.

3-4

Temperature Knob

The middle knob on the control panel lets you select

the desired air temperature in your vehicle. This knob

will allow you to adjust the interior air temperature

independently of the function knob setting. Move the

knob clockwise toward 82 for warmer air. Move the

knob counterclockwise toward 66 for cooler air.

Full Hot: If you turn the temperature knob past

82 F (28 C), the system will go into the “full hot”

mode. The system will remain at that maximum heating

setting and the fan will blow at the speed the fan knob is

set to. If the fan is in AUTO, it will run at full speed.

Full Cold: If you turn the temperature knob past

66 F (19 C), the system will go into the “full cold”

mode. The system will remain at that maximum cooling

setting and the fan will blow at the speed the fan knob is

set to. If the fan is in AUTO, it will run at full speed.

Choosing either maximum setting will not cause the

system to heat or cool any faster.

Mode Knob - Automatic Operation

The right knob on the control panel allows you to

choose the direction of air delivery. When the system is

set for automatic operation, sensors will control the air

delivery mode. Air will come primarily from the floor or

instrument panel outlets, with some air directed to the

windshield to prevent fogging.

When the system is in AUTO mode, the air conditioning

light will turn on, and the recirculation and outside air

lights turn off. With the system in full auto control

(both the fan and mode knobs in AUTO), you still

have the ability to override any function. However,

continually overriding the outside air or the A/C

compressor will limit the ability of the system to cool

the vehicle quickly.

If you push a button for a function which is not

available, the light next to that button will flash three

times to alert you that it’s not available.

To find your comfort zone, start with the 74 F (23 C)

setting and allow about 20 minutes for the system to

adjust the temperature if necessary.

3-5

With the automatic setting, the air conditioning

compressor automatically cycles when needed to cool the

air. In cold weather, when the system senses the need for

heat, the airflow will be directed out of the floor outlets.

As the interior temperature approaches a desired setting,

the fan speed will decrease. To maintain interior comfort,

the airflow will adjust between the instrument panel air

outlets and floor outlets. On bright sunny days in cool

weather, the airflow may come out of the air conditioning

and floor outlets (bi-level mode) to maintain comfort and

prevent stuffiness.

To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather, the system

will delay turning on the fan until warm air is available.

The length of delay depends on the outside air temperature,

engine coolant temperature or the time since the engine was

last started. As the coolant warms up, the fan speed will

gradually increase and air will flow from the heater outlets,

with some airflow to the windshield to prevent fogging

under most normal conditions.

If your vehicle is sitting out on a warm day and you

have the fan set on AUTO, the air will first flow out of

the floor air outlets for a few seconds. That is normal.

This is to expel hot air from the air outlets.

As the air is cooled, the airflow will move through the

air conditioning outlets.

Be careful not to put anything over the solar sensor

located around the center of the instrument panel.

This sensor is used by the automatic system to

regulate temperature.

Mode Knob - Manual Operation

The right knob on the control panel allows you to

choose the direction of air delivery.

You can choose to set the climate control system

operations yourself, or let the system work for you

by placing the system in AUTO mode. See “Mode

Knob - Automatic Operation” earlier in this section.

VENT: This setting directs most of the air through

the instrument panel outlets and a small amount through

the floor outlets.

BI-LEVEL: This setting directs air through

the heater floor outlets as well as the instrument

panel outlets.

3-6

HEATER: This setting directs most of the

warmed air through the heater floor outlets and some

air through the windshield defroster outlets.

BLEND: This setting divides airflow equally

between the heater floor outlet and the windshield

defroster outlets. The air conditioning compressor may

run to dehumidify the air to prevent window fogging.

DEFROST: This setting directs most air through

the windshield defroster outlets and some through the

heater outlets. The air conditioning compressor may run

to dehumidify the air to prevent window fogging.

OUTSIDE AIR: Press this button to force

the system to use outside air. Press it again to close off

the outside air.

Pressing the OUTSIDE AIR button will cancel the

RECIRCULATION button.

RECIRCULATION: Press this button to

limit the amount of outside air entering your vehicle.

This is helpful when you are trying to limit odors

entering your vehicle. In the AUTO mode, the

system will use recirculation as necessary to cool

the air. Pressing the recirculation button will change

the operation to a manual mode. Press this button

again to turn off the recirculation feature.

RECIRCULATION may be selected with the fan knob

in OFF to limit odors, outside air and dust from entering

your vehicle.

Pressing the RECIRCULATION button will cancel the

OUTSIDE AIR button.

A/C: Press this button to turn the air conditioning

on and off. The system will cool and dehumidify the air

inside the vehicle when the A/C light is on.

Air conditioning will be automatically disabled when

the outside temperature drops below a level at which air

conditioning is ineffective.

Remember that in order for the automatic system to perform

well, it needs A/C to provide cooling performance.

3-7

Air Conditioning

On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot

inside air escape. This reduces the time it takes for your

vehicle to cool down. Then keep your windows closed

for the air conditioner to work its best.

For quick cool-down on very hot days, use MAX A/C

with the temperature knob turned to the left. This setting

should be used to keep odors and/or dust from entering

the vehicle. For normal cooling on hot days, use A/C

with the temperature knob turned to the left.

On vehicles equipped with the Electronic Climate Control

system, this same performance can be achieved as long as

the A/C is on and the outside air button is not active.

On cool but sunny days, use BI-LEVEL A/C to deliver

warm air to the floor and cooler air to the instrument

panel outlets.

When the air conditioner is on, you may sometimes

notice slight changes in your vehicle’s engine speed

and power. This is normal because the system is

designed to cycle the compressor on and off to keep

the desired temperature.

Heating

The heater works best if you keep your windows closed

while using it. On cold days, use HEATER with the

temperature knob turned clockwise. BLEND is useful

in cool weather when you have fog or ice on the

windshield or side windows.

If you use the optional engine coolant heater before

starting your engine, your heating system will produce

warmer air faster to heat the passenger compartment in

cold weather. See “Engine Coolant Heater” in the Index.

Defogging and Defrosting

On cool, humid days, use BLEND to keep the

windshield and side windows clear.

Use DEFROST to remove fog or ice from the

windshield quickly in extreme humid or cold conditions.

Turn the temperature knob to the right and move the

fan knob toward high.

3-8

Rear Window Defogger (If Equipped)

If your vehicle has this

option, the rear window

will have lines that

warm the glass.

For best results, clear the window of as much snow or

ice as possible before using the rear window defogger.

To turn on the rear window defogger, find the button

marked REAR with the defog symbol on the lower right

corner of your climate control system. Press the button

until the light in the button comes on, then release it.

It will only work if the ignition switch is turned to RUN.

Pressing the REAR button on your climate control

system will also activate your heated outside mirrors

(if equipped). This will help to keep ice and snow from

collecting on your mirror surfaces.

The rear window defogger will stay on for five to seven

minutes, then turn off. If you need additional warming

time, turn it on again. You can turn the defogger off at

any time by pressing the button.

Do not attach a temporary vehicle license, tape or decals

across the defogger grid on the rear window.

NOTICE:

Don’t use a razor blade or something else sharp

on the inside of the rear window. If you do, you

could cut or damage the warming grid, and the

repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.

3-9

Ventilation System

For mild outside temperatures when little heating or

cooling is needed, use PANEL or VENT to direct

outside air through your vehicle. Airflow is through the

instrument panel outlets.

Your vehicle’s ventilation system supplies outside air to

the inside of your vehicle when it is moving. When the

vehicle is not moving, you can get outside air to flow

through by selecting any mode and any fan speed.

You will find air outlets in the center and on the sides of

your instrument panel.

You can direct the airflow side-to-side by turning the

thumbwheel located in the center of the vent. The vent

can be tilted up and down also. To control the amount

of airflow through the outlets, turn the thumbwheel

below the vent.

Ventilation Tips

Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice, snow or

any other obstruction (such as leaves). The heater

and defroster will work far better, reducing the

chance of fogging the inside of your windows.

When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, move the

fan knob to high for a few moments before driving

off. This helps clear the intake ducts of snow and

moisture, and reduces the chance of fogging the

inside of your windows.

Keep the air path under the front seats clear of

objects. This helps air to circulate throughout

your vehicle.

3-10

Audio Systems

Your audio system has been designed to operate easily

and give years of listening pleasure. You will get the

most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with it

first. Find out what your audio system can do and how

to operate all its controls, to be sure you’re getting the

most out of the advanced engineering that went into it.

Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory

Power (RAP). With RAP, you can play your audio

system even after the ignition is off. See ”Retained

Accessory Power” in the Index.

Setting the Clock for Systems with

SET Button

Press SET. Within five seconds, press and hold the

SEEK right arrow until the correct minute appears on

the display. Press and hold the SEEK left arrow until

the correct hour appears on the display.

Setting the Clock for Systems with HR

and MN Buttons

Press and hold HR until the correct hour appears on

the display. Press and hold MN until the correct minute

appears on the display. To display the clock with the

ignition off, press RECALL or HR/MN and the time

will be displayed for a few seconds. There is an initial

two-second delay before the clock goes into the

time-set mode.

3-11

AM-FM Stereo

Playing the Radio

VOLUME: This knob turns the system on and off

and controls the volume. To increase volume and

turn the radio on, turn the knob clockwise. Turn it

counterclockwise to decrease volume and turn the

radio off.

RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by

pressing the recall knob. When the radio is playing,

press this knob to recall the station frequency.

Finding a Station

AM-FM: Press the lower knob to switch between

AM and FM. The display shows your selection.

TUNE: Turn the lower knob to tune in radio stations.

SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher

station and the left arrow to tune to the next lower

station and stay there.

SCAN: Select either AM, FM1 or FM2 mode and

press both SEEK buttons to listen to a few seconds of

each radio station. SCAN will light up on the display.

The radio will automatically SCAN to the next higher

station, play that station for a few seconds, then SCAN

to the next higher station. Press VOLUME or both

SEEK buttons to stop scanning.

3-12

PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttons let

you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to

14 stations (seven AM and seven FM). Just:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press AM-FM to select the band.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)

5. Press one of the four pushbuttons within five

seconds. Whenever you press that numbered

button, the station you set will return.

6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

In addition to the four stations already set, up to three

more stations may be preset on each band by pressing

two adjoining buttons at the same time. Just:

1. Tune in the desired station.

2. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)

3. Press two adjoining buttons at the same time,

within five seconds. Whenever you press the same

two buttons, the station you set will return.

4. Repeat the steps for each pair of pushbuttons.

Setting the Tone

BASS: Slide this lever up or down to increase or

decrease bass.

TREB: Slide this lever up or down to increase or

decrease treble. If a station is weak or noisy, you may

want to decrease the treble.

Adjusting the Speakers

BAL: Turn the control behind the upper knob to move

the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle

position balances the sound between the speakers.

FADE: Turn the control behind the lower knob to move

the sound to the front or rear speakers. The middle

position balances the sound between the speakers.

3-13

AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player

(If Equipped)

Playing the Radio

VOLUME: This knob turns the system on and off

and controls the volume. To increase volume and

turn the radio on, turn the knob clockwise. Turn it

counterclockwise to decrease volume and turn the

radio off.

RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off

by pressing this knob. When the radio is playing,

press this knob to recall the station frequency.

Finding a Station

AM FM: Press the lower knob to switch between

AM, FM1 and FM2.

TUNE: Turn the lower knob to tune in radio stations.

SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next

higher station and the left arrow to tune to the next

lower station.

PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttons let

you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to

21 stations (seven AM, seven FM1 and seven FM2). Just:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press AM FM to select the band.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)

5. Press one of the four pushbuttons within five

seconds. Whenever you press that numbered

button, the station you set will return.

6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

3-14

In addition to the four stations already set, up to three

more stations may be preset on each band by pressing

two adjoining buttons at the same time. Just:

1. Tune in the desired station.

2. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)

3. Press two adjoining buttons at the same time,

within five seconds. Whenever you press the same

two buttons, the station you set will return.

4. Repeat the steps for each pair of pushbuttons.

P.SCAN: Select either AM, FM1 or FM2 mode and

press both SEEK buttons to scan through each of your

preset stations. The system will scan through and play

each preset station stored on your pushbuttons for a few

seconds. Press either SEEK button or RECALL to stop

scanning through the preset stations.

Setting the Tone

BASS: Slide this lever up or down to increase or

decrease bass.

TREB: Slide this lever up or down to increase or

decrease treble. If a station is weak or noisy, you may

want to decrease the treble.

Adjusting the Speakers

BAL: Turn the control behind the upper knob to move

the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle

position balances the sound between the speakers.

FADE: Turn the control behind the lower knob to move

the sound to the front or rear speakers. The middle

position balances the sound between the speakers.

Playing a Cassette Tape

Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that

are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes

longer than that are so thin they may not work well in

this player.

Once the tape is playing, use the knobs for VOLUME,

BAL, FADE, BASS and TREB just as you do for

the radio.

REV: Press the SEEK left arrow to reverse the

cassette tape. Press the SEEK right arrow to stop

reversing the tape.

FWD: Press the SEEK right arrow to advance the

cassette tape. Press the SEEK left arrow to stop

forwarding the tape.

RECALL: Press this knob to switch tape sides.

3-15

EJECT: Press this button to remove the tape or stop

the tape and play the radio.

CLN: If this message appears on the display, the

cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play

tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to

prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of

Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you

clean the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds

to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display --- to

show the indicator was reset.

CD Adapter Kits

It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit

with your cassette tape player after activating the bypass

feature on your tape player.

To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Insert the adapter into the cassette slot.

3. Within five seconds, press and hold the REV and

FWD buttons at the same time for three seconds.

The tape symbol on the display will flash, showing

that the cut tape detection feature is no longer active.

This override routine will remain active until EJECT

is pressed.

AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player

and Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)

Playing the Radio

PWR-VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on

and off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise.

Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume. The knob

is capable of being turned continuously.

RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by

pressing this button. When the radio is playing, press

this button to recall the station frequency.

3-16

SCV: Your system has a feature called

Speed-Compensated Volume (SCV). With SCV,

your audio system adjusts automatically to make up

for road and wind noise as you drive. Set the volume at

the desired level. Turn the control ring behind the upper

knob clockwise to adjust the SCV. Then, as you drive,

SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary,

to overcome noise at any particular speed. The volume

level should always sound the same to you as you drive.

If you don’t want to use SCV, turn the control all the

way down. Each notch on the control ring allows for

more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.

Finding a Station

AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM,

FM1 and FM2. The display will show your selection.

TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to

choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored

position when you’re not using it.

SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next

higher station and the left arrow to tune to the next

lower station and stay there. The sound will mute

while seeking.

SCAN: Press and hold SEEK for two seconds until

SCAN appears on the display. SCAN allows you to

listen to stations for a few seconds. The receiver will

continue to scan and momentarily stop at each station

until you press the button again. The sound will mute

while scanning.

PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let

you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to

18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press AM FM to select the band.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press AUTO TONE to select the setting you prefer.

5. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons.

The sound will mute. When it returns, release the

button. Whenever you press that numbered button,

the station you set will return and the tone you

selected will be automatically selected for that button.

6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

3-17

P.SCAN: The preset scan button lets you scan through

your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons.

Select either the AM, FM1 or FM2 mode and then

press P. SCAN. It will scan through each station stored

on your pushbuttons and stop for a few seconds before

continuing to scan through all of the pushbuttons.

Press P. SCAN again or one of the pushbuttons to stop

scanning to listen to a specific preset station. P. SCAN

will light up on the display while in this mode. If one of

the stations stored on a pushbutton is too weak for the

location you are in, the radio display will show the

channel number (P1 through P6) for several seconds

before advancing to the next preset station.

Setting the Tone

BASS: Press lightly on this knob to release it from

its stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase

bass and counterclockwise to decrease bass. When the

BASS control is turned, the AUTO TONE display will

go blank.

TREB: Press lightly on this knob to release it

from its stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to

increase treble and counterclockwise to decrease treble.

When the TREB control is turned, the AUTO TONE

display will go blank. If a station is weak or noisy,

you may want to decrease the treble.

Push these knobs back into their stored positions when

you’re not using them.

AUTO TONE: Press this button to select among the

six preset equalization settings and tailor the sound to

the music or voice being heard. Each time you press the

button, the selection will switch to one of the preset

settings of CLASSIC, NEWS, ROCK, POP, C/W

(Country/Western) or JAZZ. To return to the manual

mode, press and release this button until the AUTO

TONE display goes blank. This will return the tone

adjustment to the BASS and TREB controls. If a

BASS or TREB control is turned, the AUTO TONE

display will go blank. Use PUSHBUTTONS to program

AUTO TONE.

3-18

Adjusting the Speakers

BAL: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its

stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust

sound to the right speakers and counterclockwise to

adjust sound to the left speakers. The middle position

balances the sound between the speakers.

FADE: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its

stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust the

sound to the front speakers and counterclockwise for the

rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound

between the speakers.

Push these knobs back into their stored positions when

you’re not using them.

Playing a Cassette Tape

Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that

are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes

longer than that are so thin they may not work well in

this player.

To load a cassette tape with the ignition off, press

EJECT or RECALL. Then, insert the cassette tape.

If the ignition is on but the radio is off, the tape will

begin playing.

Once the tape is playing, use the VOL, AUTO TONE,

BAL, FADE, BASS and TREB controls just as you

do for the radio. The tape symbol and a direction arrow

will be on the display whenever a tape is being played.

Anytime a tape is inserted, the top side is selected for

play first.

The player automatically senses if the cassette tape is

metal or CrO2 and adjusts for best playback sound.

PREV (1): Press the PREV button or the SEEK left

arrow to search for the previous selection. A minimum

three-second blank gap is required for the player to

stop at the beginning of the selection. The tape direction

arrow will blink during the SEEK operation.

PROG (2): Press this button to switch from one side

of the tape to the other.

NEXT (3): Press the NEXT button or the SEEK right

arrow to search for the next selection. A minimum

three-second blank gap is required for the player to

stop at the beginning of the selection. The tape direction

arrow will blink during the SEEK operation. The sound

will mute while searching for the next selection.

3-19

REV (4): Press this button to rapidly reverse the tape to

the beginning of the cassette or until you press REV

again. The radio will play the last selected station while

reversing the tape. The tape direction arrow will blink

during the reverse operation.

(5): Press this button to reduce cassette tape noise.

The double-D symbol will appear on the display while

the player is in this mode.

Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a

license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of

Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

FWD (6): Press this button to rapidly forward the tape

to the end of the cassette or until you press FWD again.

The radio will play the last selected station while

forwarding the tape. The tape direction arrow will blink

during the forward operation.

AM FM: Press this button to switch from a tape

to the radio.

TAPE AUX: Press this button to return to the tape

player when playing the radio. The lighted arrow will

appear and show the direction of play when a tape is in

the active mode.

EJECT: Press this button to remove the tape.

The radio will now play. EJECT can be used with either

the ignition or radio off. To load a cassette tape with

the ignition or radio off, press EJECT before loading

the cassette.

CLN: If this message appears on the display, the

cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play

tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to

prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of

Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you

clean the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds

to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display --- to

show the indicator was reset.

3-20

CD Adapter Kits

It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit

with your cassette tape player after activating the bypass

feature on your tape player.

To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps:

1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.

2. Turn the radio off.

3. Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for five

seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash

for two seconds, indicating the feature is active.

4. Insert the adapter into the cassette slot. It will

power up the radio and begin playing.

This override routine will remain active until EJECT

is pressed.

AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player

(Bose ) (If Equipped)

Included with the AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape

Player are six Bose high performance speakers and a six

channel Bose amplifier. Please see your dealer for details.

Playing the Radio

PWR-VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on

and off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise.

Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume. The knob

is capable of being turned continuously.

3-21

MUTE: Press this button to silence the system.

Press it again to turn on the sound.

REAR DSPL (Vehicles with Rear Seat Audio):

If your vehicle has rear seat audio, then it will have a

button labeled REAR DSPL instead of the MUTE

button. When the main radio is turned on, press this

button to turn the rear seat audio display on the

main radio. Press it again to turn the rear seat audio

display off.

RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off

by pressing this button. When the radio is playing,

press this button to recall the station frequency.

SCV: Your system has a feature called

Speed-Compensated Volume (SCV). With SCV,

your audio system adjusts automatically to make up

for road and wind noise as you drive. Set the volume at

the desired level. Turn the control ring behind the upper

knob clockwise to adjust the SCV. Then, as you drive,

SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary,

to overcome noise at any particular speed. The volume

level should always sound the same to you as you drive.

If you don’t want to use SCV, turn the control all the

way down. Each notch on the control ring allows for

more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.

Finding a Station

AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM,

FM1 and FM2. The display will show your selection.

TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it

to choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its

stored position when you’re not using it.

SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next

higher station and the left arrow to tune to the next

lower station and stay there. The sound will mute

while seeking.

SCAN: Press and hold SEEK for two seconds until

SCAN appears on the display. SCAN allows you to

listen to stations for a few seconds. The receiver will

continue to scan and momentarily stop at each station

until you press the button again. The sound will mute

while scanning.

3-22

PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let

you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to

18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press AM-FM to select the band.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons.

The sound will mute. When it returns, release the

button. Whenever you press that numbered button,

the station you set will return.

5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

P. SCAN: The preset scan button lets you scan through

your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons.

Select either the AM, FM1 or FM2 mode and then

press P. SCAN. It will scan through each station stored

on your pushbuttons and stop for a few seconds before

continuing to scan through all of the pushbuttons.

Press P. SCAN again or one of the pushbuttons to stop

scanning to listen to a specific preset station. P. SCAN

will light up on the display while in this mode. If one

of the stations stored on a pushbutton is too weak for

the location you are in, the radio display will show the

channel number (P1 through P6) for several seconds

before advancing to the next preset station.

Setting the Tone

BASS: Press lightly on this knob to release it from

its stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase

bass and counterclockwise to decrease bass.

TREB: Press lightly on this knob to release it from

its stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase

treble and counterclockwise to decrease treble. If a

station is weak or noisy, you may want to decrease

the treble.

Push these knobs back into their stored positions when

you’re not using them.

Adjusting the Speakers

BAL: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its

stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust

sound to the right speakers and counterclockwise to

adjust sound to the left speakers. The middle position

balances the sound between the speakers.

FADE: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its

stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust the

sound to the front speakers and counterclockwise for the

rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound

between the speakers.

Push these knobs back into their stored positions when

you’re not using them.

3-23

Playing a Cassette Tape

Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that

are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes

longer than that are so thin they may not work well

in this player.

To load a cassette tape with the ignition off, press

EJECT or RECALL. Then, insert the cassette tape.

If the ignition is on but the radio is off, the tape will

begin playing.

Once the tape is playing, use the VOL, BAL, FADE,

BASS and TREB controls just as you do for the radio.

The tape symbol and a direction arrow will be on the

display whenever a tape is being played. Anytime a tape

is inserted, the top side is selected for play first.

The player automatically senses if the cassette tape is

metal or CrO2 and adjusts for best playback sound.

PREV (1): Press the PREV button or the SEEK left

arrow to search for the previous selection. A minimum

three-second blank gap is required for the player to

stop at the beginning of the selection. The tape direction

arrow will blink during the SEEK operation.

PROG (2): Press this button to switch from one side

of the tape to the other.

NEXT (3): Press the NEXT button or the SEEK right

arrow to search for the next selection. A minimum

three-second blank gap is required for the player to

stop at the beginning of the selection. The tape direction

arrow will blink during the SEEK operation. The sound

will mute while searching for the next selection.

REV (4): Press this button to rapidly reverse the tape

to the beginning of the cassette or until you press REV

again. The radio will play the last selected station while

reversing the tape. The tape direction arrow will blink

during the reverse operation.

(5): Press this button to reduce cassette tape noise.

The double-D symbol will appear on the display while

the player is in this mode.

Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a

license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of

Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

FWD (6): Press this button to rapidly forward the

tape to the end of the cassette or until you press FWD

again. The radio will play the last selected station while

forwarding the tape. The tape direction arrow will blink

during the forward operation.

3-24

AM FM: Press this button to switch from a tape

to the radio.

CD TAPE: Press this button if you have a tape loaded

in the cassette tape player and the radio is turned on, to

play a tape. Press AM-FM to return to the radio when

a tape is playing. Press CD TAPE to switch between

the tape player, remote CD and console-mounted

CD changer if all are loaded. When a tape is playing,

a lighted arrow will appear on the display and show the

direction of play. (If the radio is turned off, the tape

stays in the player and will resume playing at the point

where it stopped.)

EJECT: Press this button to remove the tape.

The radio will now play. EJECT can be used with either

the ignition or radio off. To load a cassette tape with

the ignition or radio off, press EJECT before loading

the cassette.

CLN: If this message appears on the display, the

cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play

tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to

prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of

Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you

clean the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds

to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display --- to

show the indicator was reset.

CD Adapter Kits

It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit

with your cassette tape player after activating the bypass

feature on your tape player.

To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps:

1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.

2. Turn the radio off.

3. Press and hold the CD TAPE button for five

seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash

for two seconds, indicating the feature is active.

4. Insert the adapter into the cassette slot. It will

power up the radio and begin playing.

This override routine will remain active until EJECT

is pressed.

3-25

AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player

and Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)

Playing the Radio

PWR-VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on

and off. To increase volume, turn this knob clockwise.

Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume. The knob

is capable of turning continuously.

RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by

pressing this button. When the radio is playing, press

this button to recall the station frequency.

SCV: Your system has a feature called

Speed-Compensated Volume (SCV). With SCV,

your audio system adjusts automatically to make up

for road and wind noise as you drive. Set the volume at

the desired level. Turn the control ring behind the upper

knob clockwise to adjust the SCV. Then, as you drive,

SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary,

to overcome noise at any particular speed. The volume

level should always sound the same to you as you drive.

If you don’t want to use SCV, turn the control all the

way down. Each notch on the control ring allows for

more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.

Finding a Station

AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM,

FM1 and FM2. The display will show your selection.

TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it

to choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its

stored position when you’re not using it.

SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next

higher station and the left arrow to tune to the next

lower station and stay there. The sound will mute

while seeking.

3-26

SCAN: Press and hold SEEK for two seconds until

SCAN appears on the display. SCAN allows you to

listen to stations for a few seconds. The receiver will

continue to scan and momentarily stop at each station

until you press the button again. The sound will mute

while scanning.

PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let

you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to

18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press AM-FM to select the band.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press AUTO TONE to select the setting you prefer.

5. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons.

The sound will mute. When it returns, release the

button. Whenever you press that numbered button,

the station you set will return and the tone you

selected will be automatically selected for that button.

6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

P.SCAN: The preset scan button lets you scan through

your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons.

Select either the AM, FM1 or FM2 mode and then

press P.SCAN.

It will scan through each station stored on your

pushbuttons and stop for a few seconds before

continuing to scan through all of the pushbuttons.

Press P.SCAN again or one of the pushbuttons to stop

scanning to listen to a specific stored station. P.SCAN

will light up on the display while in this mode. If one

of the stations stored on a pushbutton is too weak for

the location you are in, the radio display will show the

channel number (P1 through P6) for several seconds

before advancing to the next preset station.

Setting the Tone

BASS: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its

stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase

bass and counterclockwise to decrease bass. When the

BASS control is turned, the AUTO TONE display will

go blank.

TREB: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its

stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase

treble and counterclockwise to decrease treble. When

the TREB control is turned, the AUTO TONE display

will go blank. If a station is weak or noisy, you may

want to decrease the treble.

Push these knobs back into their stored positions when

you’re not using them.

3-27

AUTO TONE: Press this button to select among the

six preset equalization settings and tailor the sound to

the music or voice being heard. Each time you press the

button, the selection will switch to one of the preset

settings of CLASSIC, NEWS, ROCK, POP, C/W

(Country/Western) or JAZZ. To return to the manual

mode, press and release this button until the AUTO

TONE display goes blank. This will return the tone

adjustment to the BASS and TREB controls. If a

BASS or TREB control is turned, the AUTO TONE

display will go blank. Use PUSHBUTTONS to program

AUTO TONE.

Adjusting the Speakers

BAL: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its

stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust

sound to the right speakers and counterclockwise to

adjust sound to the left speakers. The middle position

balances the sound between the speakers.

FADE: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its

stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust the

sound to the front speakers and counterclockwise for the

rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound

between the speakers.

Push these knobs back into their stored positions when

you’re not using them.

Playing a Compact Disc

PWR: Press this knob to turn the system on.

(You can also turn the system on when you insert a

compact disc into the player with the ignition on.)

Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up.

The player will pull it in. Wait a few seconds and

the disc should play. CD and a CD symbol will also

appear on the display. Anytime you are playing a CD,

the letters CD will be next to the CD symbol.

If the disc comes back out and ERR appears on the

display, it could be that:

You are driving on a very rough road.

(The disc should play when the road gets smoother.)

The disc is upside down.

It is dirty, scratched or wet.

It is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour

and try again.)

The disc player is very hot.

Press RECALL to make ERR go off the display.

PREV (1): Press PREV or the SEEK left arrow to

search for the previous selection. If you hold this button

or press it more than once, the disc will advance further.

Sound is muted in this mode.

3-28

RDM (2): Press this button to play the tracks on the disc

in random order. While in the RDM mode, RANDOM

appears on the display. Press RDM again to return to

normal play.

NEXT (3): Press NEXT or the SEEK right arrow to

search for the next selection. If you hold this button or

press it more than once, the disc will advance further.

The next track number will appear on the display.

Sound is muted in this mode.

REV (4): Press and hold REV to return rapidly to a

favorite passage. You will hear the disc selection play at

high speed while you press the REV button. This allows

you to listen and find out when the disc is at the desired

selection. Release REV to resume playing.

FWD (6): Press and hold this button to advance rapidly

within a track. You will hear the disc selection play at

high speed while you press the FWD button. This allows

you to listen and find out when the disc is at the desired

selection. Release FWD to resume playing.

RECALL: Press this button to see what track is playing.

Press it again within five seconds to see how long the

CD has been playing that track. Elapsed time is

displayed in minutes and seconds. The track number

will also appear when a new track begins to play.

Press RECALL again to return to the time display.

AM FM: While in the CD mode, press this button to

stop playing the CD and play the radio. The CD symbol

will still display but the word CD will be replaced with

either AM, FM1 or FM2. (If the radio is turned off,

the disc stays in the player and will resume playing at

the point where it stopped.)

CD AUX: To switch between the player and the radio

when a disc is playing, press the AM-FM button.

To return to the player, press CD AUX. When a disc is

playing, the letters CD and the CD symbol will appear

on the display. (If the radio is turned off, the disc stays

in the player and will resume playing at the point where

it stopped.)

EJECT: Press this button to eject the disc from the

player and play the radio. When the same or a new disc

is inserted, the disc will start playing on track one.

If a compact disc is left sitting in the opening for more

than a few seconds, the player will pull the CD back in.

The radio will continue playing. When the ignition is

off, press this button to load a CD.

3-29

AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player

(Bose ) (If Equipped)

Included with the AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc

Player are six Bose high performance speakers and a six

channel Bose amplifier. Please see your dealer for details.

Playing the Radio

PWR-VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on

and off. To increase volume, turn this knob clockwise.

Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume. The knob

is capable of turning continuously.

MUTE: Press this button to silence the system.

Press it again to turn on the sound.

REAR DSPL (Vehicles with Rear Seat Audio):

If your vehicle has rear seat audio, then it will have a

button labeled REAR DSPL instead of the MUTE

button. When the main radio is turned on, press this

button to turn the rear seat audio display on the

main radio. Press it again to turn the rear seat audio

display off.

RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off

by pressing this button. When the radio is playing,

press this button to recall the station frequency.

SCV: Your system has a feature called

Speed-Compensated Volume (SCV). With SCV,

your audio system adjusts automatically to make up

for road and wind noise as you drive. Set the volume at

the desired level. Turn the control ring behind the upper

knob clockwise to adjust the SCV. Then, as you drive,

SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary,

to overcome noise at any particular speed. The volume

level should always sound the same to you as you drive.

If you don’t want to use SCV, turn the control all the

way down. Each notch on the control ring allows for

more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.

3-30

Finding a Station

AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM,

FM1 and FM2. The display will show your selection.

TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends.

Turn it to choose radio stations. Push the knob back

into its stored position when you’re not using it.

SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next

higher station and the left arrow to tune to the next

lower station and stay there. The sound will mute

while seeking.

SCAN: Press and hold SEEK for two seconds until

SCAN appears on the display. SCAN allows you to

listen to stations for a few seconds. The receiver will

continue to scan and momentarily stop at each station

until you press the button again. The sound will mute

while scanning.

PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let

you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to

18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press AM FM to select the band.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons.

The sound will mute. When it returns, release the

button. Whenever you press that numbered button,

the station you set will return.

5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

P.SCAN: The preset scan button lets you scan through

your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons.

Select either the AM, FM1 or FM2 mode and then

press P.SCAN. It will scan through each station stored

on your pushbuttons and stop for a few seconds before

continuing to scan through all of the pushbuttons.

Press P.SCAN again or one of the pushbuttons to stop

scanning to listen to a specific stored station. P.SCAN

will light up on the display while in this mode. If one

of the stations stored on a pushbutton is too weak for

the location you are in, the radio display will show the

channel number (P1 through P6) for several seconds

before advancing to the next preset station.

3-31

Setting the Tone

BASS: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its

stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase

bass and counterclockwise to decrease bass.

TREB: Press lightly on this knob to release it

from its stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to

increase treble and counterclockwise to decrease treble.

If a station is weak or noisy, you may want to decrease

the treble.

Push these knobs back into their stored positions when

you’re not using them.

Adjusting the Speakers

BAL: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its

stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust

sound to the right speakers and counterclockwise to

adjust sound to the left speakers. The middle position

balances the sound between the speakers.

FADE: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its

stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust the

sound to the front speakers and counterclockwise for the

rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound

between the speakers.

Push these knobs back into their stored positions when

you’re not using them.

Playing a Compact Disc

PWR: Press this knob to turn the system on.

(You can also turn the system on when you insert a

compact disc into the player with the ignition on.)

Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up.

The player will pull it in. Wait a few seconds and the

disc should play. The letters CD and a CD symbol will

appear on the display. Anytime you are playing a CD,

the letters CD will be next to the CD symbol.

If the disc comes back out and ERR appears on the

display, it could be that:

You are driving on a very rough road.

(The disc should play when the road gets smoother.)

The disc is upside down.

It is dirty, scratched or wet.

It is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour

and try again.)

The disc player is very hot.

Press RECALL to make ERR go off the display.

PREV (1): Press PREV or the SEEK left arrow to

search for the previous selection. If you hold this button

or press it more than once, the disc will advance further.

Sound is muted in this mode.

3-32

RDM (2): Press this button to play the tracks on the disc

in random order. While in the RDM mode, RANDOM

appears on the display. Press RDM again to return to

normal play.

NEXT (3): Press NEXT or the SEEK right arrow to

search for the next selection. If you hold this button or

press it more than once, the disc will advance further.

The next track number will appear on the display.

Sound is muted in this mode.

REV (4): Press and hold REV to return rapidly to a

favorite passage. You will hear the disc selection play at

high speed while you press the REV button. This allows

you to listen and find out when the disc is at the desired

selection. Release REV to resume playing.

FWD (6): Press and hold this button to advance rapidly

within a track. You will hear the disc selection play at

high speed while you press the FWD button. This allows

you to listen and find out when the disc is at the desired

selection. Release FWD to resume playing.

RECALL: Press this button to see what track is playing.

Press it again within five seconds to see how long the

CD has been playing that track. Elapsed time is

displayed in minutes and seconds. The track number

will also appear when a new track begins to play.

Press RECALL again to return to the time display.

AM-FM: While in the CD mode, press this button to

stop playing the CD and play the radio. The CD symbol

will still display but the word CD will be replaced with

either AM, FM1 or FM2. (If the radio is turned off,

the disc stays in the player and will resume playing at

the point where it stopped.)

CD AUX: Press this button if you have a disc loaded

in the CD player and the radio is turned on, to play a

compact disc. Press AM-FM to return to the radio when

a compact disc is playing. Press CD AUX to switch

between the compact disc player and console-mounted

CD changer if both are loaded. When a disc is playing,

the letters CD and the CD symbol will appear on the

display. (If the radio is turned off, the disc stays in

the player and will resume playing at the point where

it stopped.)

EJECT: Press this button to eject the disc from the

player and play the radio. When the same or a new

disc is inserted, the disc will start playing on track one.

If a compact disc is left sitting in the opening for more

than a few seconds, the player will pull the CD back in.

The radio will continue playing. When the ignition is

off, press this button to load a CD.

3-33

Remote Cassette Tape Player (If Equipped)

If you have an AM-FM Stereo Audio Compact Disc

Automatic Tone Control System that includes a remote

cassette player, the cassette player is located in the front

of the center console.

Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that

are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes

longer than that are so thin they may not work well in

this player.

To load a cassette tape with the ignition off, first press

EJECT on the remote player. Then, insert the cassette tape.

The tape will play if the ignition is on but the radio is off.

Once the tape is playing, use the control knobs for VOL,

AUTO TONE, BAL, FADE, BASS and TREB just as

you do for the radio.

A lighted tape symbol shows when a cassette tape is in

the player. A lighted arrow will also appear and show the

direction of play when a tape is active.

The player automatically senses if the cassette tape is

metal or CrO2 and adjusts for best playback sound.

Anytime a cassette tape is inserted, the top side is

selected for play first.

PREV (1): Press PREV or the SEEK left arrow (in the

opposite direction that the lighted tape direction arrow

points) to search for the previous selection. A minimum

three-second blank gap is needed for the player to

stop at the beginning of the selection. The tape direction

arrow will blink during the SEEK operation and the

sound is muted in this mode.

NEXT (3): Press NEXT or the SEEK right arrow

(in the direction that the lighted tape direction arrow

points) to search for the next selection. The tape

direction arrow will blink during SEEK operation and

the sound is muted in this mode.

REV (4): Press this button to rapidly reverse the tape.

The tape will rapidly reverse to the beginning of the

cassette reel or until you press REV again. The radio

plays the last selected station during REV.

3-34

(5): Press this pushbutton to turn Dolby NR on

and off. Dolby NR is active when a tape is inserted in

the remote cassette. The double-D symbol will appear

on the display.

Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a

license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of

Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

FWD (6): Press this button to rapidly advance the tape.

The tape will rapidly advance to the end of the cassette

reel or until you press FWD again. The radio plays the

last selected station during FWD.

PROG: Press this button on the remote player to go

from one side of the tape to the other.

TAPE: Press the AM-FM button to switch from the

player and the radio when a tape is playing. To return to

the tape player, press CD AUX. The lighted arrow will

appear next to the symbol and show the direction of

play when a tape is active.

EJECT: Press this button on the remote player to

remove the tape. EJECT can be used with either the

ignition or radio off. Also, you must press EJECT before

loading a cassette with the radio off to allow loading.

Rear Seat Audio (RSA) (If Equipped)

This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to and

control any of the music sources, including AM-FM,

cassette tapes and CDs, through the Rear Seat Audio

(RSA) controller. However, the rear seat passengers

can only control the music sources that the front seat

passengers are not listening to.

3-35

For example, rear seat passengers may listen to a

cassette tape through headphones while the driver listens

to the radio through the front speakers. The rear seat

passengers have control of the volume for each set of

headphones. Be aware that the front seat audio controls

always have priority over the RSA controls. The front

seat passengers switch the source for the main radio to

a remote source, the RSA will play the same remote

source. The rear speakers will be muted when the RSA

power is turned on. You may operate the RSA functions

even when the main radio is off.

This feature is intended for rear seat passengers.

The following function is controlled by the knob on the

main radio:

PWR-VOL: Push this knob twice to turn RSA off.

The following functions are controlled by the RSA

system buttons:

PWR: Press this button to turn RSA on or off.

VOL: Press this knob lightly so it extends.

Turn the knob clockwise to increase volume and

counterclockwise to decrease volume. Push the knob

back into its stored position when you’re not using it.

The left VOL knob controls the left headphone and the

right VOL knob controls the right headphone.

AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM,

FM1 and FM2. If the front passengers are already

listening to AM-FM, the RSA controller will not switch

between the bands and cannot change the frequency.

SEEK: While listening to AM-FM, press the right

arrow to tune to the next higher station and stay there.

Press the left arrow to tune to the next lower station

and stay there. The sound will mute while seeking.

The SEEK button is inactive if the AM-FM mode on

the front radio is in use.

While listening to a cassette tape, press the right arrow to

hear the next selection on the tape. Press the left arrow to

go back to the previous selection. The SEEK button is

inactive if the tape mode on the front radio is in use.

3-36

While listening to a CD, press the right arrow to hear the

next selection on the CD. Press the left arrow to go back

to the start of the current selection (if more than eight

seconds have played). The SEEK button is inactive if

the CD mode on the front radio (if equipped) or the

CD changer is in use.

SCAN: Press and hold SEEK until the radio goes into

SCAN mode. SCAN allows you to listen to stations for

a few seconds. The receiver will continue to scan and

momentarily stop at each station until you press SEEK

again. The SCAN function is inactive if the AM-FM

mode on the front radio is in use.

P.SET PROG: The front passengers must be

listening to something different for each of these

functions to work:

Press this button to seek through the preset radio

stations set on the pushbuttons on the main radio.

When a cassette tape is playing, press this button

to go to the other side of the tape.

When a CD is playing in the CD changer,

press this button to select a disc.

TAPE CD: Press this button to switch between the tape

or CD and console-mounted CD changer if both are

loaded. Press AM-FM to return to the radio when a

cassette tape or CD is playing. The inactive tape or CD

will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.

This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to and

control any of the music sources, including AM-FM,

cassette tapes and CDs, through the Rear Seat Audio

(RSA) controller. However, the rear seat passengers

can only control the music sources that the front seat

passengers are not listening to. For example, rear seat

passengers may listen to a cassette tape through

headphones while the driver listens to the radio through

the front speakers. The rear seat passengers have control

of the volume for each set of headphones. Be aware that

the front seat audio controls always have priority over

the RSA controls. The front seat passengers switch the

source for the main radio to a remote source, the RSA

will play the same remote source. The rear speakers

will be muted when the RSA power is turned on.

You may operate the RSA functions even when the

main radio is off.

This feature is intended for rear seat passengers.

3-37

The following function is controlled by the knob on the

main radio:

PWR-VOL: Push this knob twice to turn RSA off.

The following functions are controlled by the RSA

system buttons:

PWR: Press this button to turn RSA on or off.

VOL: Press this knob lightly so it extends.

Turn the knob clockwise to increase volume and

counterclockwise to decrease volume. Push the knob

back into its stored position when you’re not using it.

The left VOL knob controls the left headphone and the

right VOL knob controls the right headphone.

AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1

and FM2. If the front passengers are already listening to

AM-FM, the RSA controller will not switch between the

bands and cannot change the frequency.

SEEK: While listening to AM-FM, press the right

arrow to tune to the next higher station and stay there.

Press the left arrow to tune to the next lower station

and stay there. The sound will mute while seeking.

The SEEK button is inactive if the AM-FM mode on

the front radio is in use.

While listening to a cassette tape, press the right arrow

to hear the next selection on the tape. Press the left

arrow to go back to the previous selection. The SEEK

button is inactive if the tape mode on the front radio is

in use.

While listening to a CD, press the right arrow to hear the

next selection on the CD. Press the left arrow to go back

to the start of the current selection (if more than eight

seconds have played). The SEEK button is inactive if

the CD mode on the front radio (if equipped) or the

CD changer is in use.

3-38

SCAN: Press and hold SEEK until the radio goes into

SCAN mode. SCAN allows you to listen to stations for

a few seconds. The receiver will continue to scan and

momentarily stop at each station until you press SEEK

again. The SCAN function is inactive if the AM-FM

mode on the front radio is in use.

P.SET PROG: The front passengers must be listening to

something different for each of these functions to work:

Press this button to seek through the preset radio

stations set on the pushbuttons on the main radio.

When a cassette tape is playing, press this button

to go to the other side of the tape.

When a CD is playing in the CD changer, press this

button to select a disc.

TAPE CD: Press this button to switch between the tape

or CD and console-mounted CD changer if both are

loaded. Press AM-FM to return to the radio when a

cassette tape or CD is playing. The inactive tape or CD

will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.

Console-Mounted CD Changer (If Equipped)

Your vehicle’s compact disc changer is located in the

center console. Some vehicles may have the compact

disc changer mounted in the front console just below

the climate control system and accessory power outlets.

With the compact disc changer, you can play up to

six discs continuously. Normal size discs may be played

using the slots supplied in the magazine.

3-39

You must first load the magazine with discs before you

can play a compact disc. Load the CDs from bottom

to top, placing the discs in the magazine label side up.

If you load a disc label side down, the disc will not play

and an error will occur. Repeat this procedure for

loading up to six discs in the magazine.

Once you have loaded the discs in the magazine,

slide open the door of the compact disc (CD) changer

(push the door and it will open on front console-mounted

(CD) changers). Push the magazine into the changer in

the direction of the arrow marked on the magazine.

Close the door by sliding it all the way forward

(push the door closed on front console-mounted (CD)

changers). When the CD magazine is loaded, the changer

will begin checking for discs in the magazine. This will

continue for up to one and a half minutes, depending on

the number of discs loaded.

To eject the magazine from the player, slide the CD

changer door all the way open, then press EJECT.

Remember to keep the door closed whenever possible

to keep dirt and dust from getting inside the changer.

Whenever a CD magazine with discs is loaded in the

changer, the CD changer symbol will appear on the

radio display. If the CD changer is checking the

magazine for CDs, the CD symbol will flash on the

display until the changer is ready to play. When a

CD begins playing, a disc and track number will be

displayed. The disc numbers are listed on the front of

the magazine.

If your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FM Stereo

with Cassette Tape Player (Bose), all of the CD changer

functions are controlled by the radio buttons, except for

ejecting the CD magazine.

3-40

PREV (1): Press this button or the SEEK left arrow to

go to the previous track if the current selection has been

playing for less than eight seconds. If the PREV button

is pressed and the current selection has been playing for

more than eight seconds, it will go to the beginning of

the current selection. If you hold or press this button

more than once, the player will continue moving back

through the disc. The sound will mute while seeking.

PROG (2): Press this button to select a disc.

The disc number and track number will be displayed.

NEXT (3): Press this button or the SEEK right arrow

to go to the next track. If you hold the button or press it

more than once, the player will continue moving forward

through the disc. The sound will mute while seeking.

REV (4): Press and hold this button to reverse quickly

through a track selection. Release it to resume playing.

FWD (6): Press and hold this button to advance quickly

through a track selection. Release it to resume playing.

SEEK: Press the right arrow to seek to the next

selection on the CD. Press the left arrow to search for

the previous selection on the CD. The sound will mute

while seeking.

P.SCAN: Press this button to hear the tracks in random,

rather than sequential, order. RANDOM will appear on

the display. Press P.SCAN again to turn off random play.

TAPE AUX: Press this button if you have a disc loaded

in the changer and the radio is turned on, to play a

compact disc. Press AM-FM to return to the radio when

a compact disc is playing. Press TAPE AUX to switch

between the tape and console-mounted CD changer

if both are loaded.

If your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FM Stereo

with Compact Disc Player (Bose), all of the CD changer

functions are controlled by the radio buttons, except for

ejecting the CD magazine.

PREV (1): Press this button or the SEEK left arrow to

go to the previous track if the current selection has been

playing for less than eight seconds. If the PREV button

is pressed and the current selection has been playing for

more than eight seconds, it will go to the beginning of

the current selection. If you hold or press this button

more than once, the player will continue moving back

through the disc. The sound will mute while seeking.

RDM (2): Press this button to hear the tracks in random,

rather than sequential, order. RANDOM will appear on

the display. Press RDM again to turn off random play.

3-41

NEXT (3): Press this button or the SEEK right arrow

to go to the next track. If you hold the button or press it

more than once, the player will continue moving forward

through the disc. The sound will mute while seeking.

REV (4): Press and hold this button to reverse quickly

through a track selection. Release it to resume playing.

(5): Press this button to select a disc. The disc number

and track number will be displayed.

FWD (6): Press and hold this button to advance quickly

through a track selection. Release it to resume playing.

SEEK: Press the right arrow to seek to the next

selection on the CD. Press the left arrow to search for

the previous selection on the CD. The sound will mute

while seeking.

CD AUX: Press this button if you have a disc loaded

in the changer and the radio is turned on, to play a

compact disc. Press AM-FM to return to the radio

when a compact disc is playing. Press CD AUX to

switch between the compact disc and console-mounted

CD changer if both are loaded.

Compact Disc Changer Errors

If ERR appears on the display, it could be that:

You are driving on a very rough road.

(The disc should play when the road gets smoother.)

A disc is upside down.

It is dirty, scratched or wet.

It is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and

try again.)

The disc player is very hot.

The CD changer door is open. Completely close

the changer door to restore normal operation.

An empty magazine is inserted in the CD changer.

Try the magazine again with a disc loaded on one

of the trays.

Press RECALL to make ERR go off the display.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be

corrected, please contact your dealer.

3-42

Theft-Deterrent Feature (If Equipped)

THEFTLOCK is designed to discourage theft of

your radio. It works by using a secret code to disable

all radio functions whenever battery power is removed.

The THEFTLOCK feature for the radio may be used or

ignored. If ignored, the system plays normally and the

radio is not protected by the feature. If THEFTLOCK is

activated, your radio will not operate if stolen.

When THEFTLOCK is activated, the radio will display

LOC to indicate a locked condition anytime battery

power has been interrupted. If your battery loses power

for any reason, you must unlock the radio with the secret

code before it will operate.

Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature

The instructions which follow explain how to enter

your secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system.

It is recommended that you read through all nine steps

before starting the procedure.

If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse between

any steps, the radio automatically reverts to time and

you must start the procedure over at Step 4.

1. Write down any three or four-digit number from

000 to 1999 and keep it in a safe place separate from

the vehicle.

2. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.

3. Turn the radio off.

4. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down

until --- shows on the display. Next you will use the

secret code number which you have written down.

5. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.

6. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree

with your code.

7. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree

with your code.

8. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the

code matches the secret code you have written down.

The display will show REP to let you know that you

need to repeat Steps 5 through 7 to confirm your

secret code.

9. Press AM-FM and this time the display will show

SEC to let you know that your radio is secure.

The LED indicator by the volume control will begin

flashing when the ignition is turned off.

3-43

Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature After a

Power Loss

Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than

15 seconds between steps:

1. Turn the ignition on. LOC will appear on the display.

2. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.

3. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree

with your code.

4. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree

with your code.

5. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the

code matches the secret code you have written down.

The display will show SEC, indicating the radio is

now operable and secure.

If you enter the wrong code eight times, INOP will

appear on the display. You will have to wait an hour with

the ignition on before you can try again. When you try

again, you will only have three chances to enter the

correct code before INOP appears.

If you lose or forget your code, contact your dealer.

Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature

Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than

15 seconds between steps:

1. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.

2. Turn the radio off.

3. Press the “1” and “4” buttons together. Hold them

down until SEC shows on the display.

4. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.

5. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree

with your code.

6. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree

with your code.

7. Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the code

matches the secret code you have written down. The

display will show ---, indicating that the radio

is no longer secured.

If the code entered is incorrect, SEC will appear on the

display. The radio will remain secured until the correct

code is entered.

When battery power is removed and later applied to a

secured radio, the radio won’t turn on and LOC will

appear on the display.

To unlock a secured radio, see “Unlocking the

Theft-Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss” earlier

in this section.

3-44

Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped)

If your vehicle has this feature, you can control certain

radio functions using the buttons on your steering wheel.

PROG: Press this button

to play a station you

have programmed on the

radio preset buttons on the

selected band.

If a cassette tape is playing, press this button to play the

other side of the tape. If a compact disc is playing in the

console-mounted CD changer (if equipped), press this

button to go to the next available CD.

SEEK: Press the up arrow to tune to the next radio

station and the down arrow to tune to the previous

radio station.

If a cassette tape or compact disc is playing, the player

will advance with the up arrow and reverse with the

down arrow.

MUTE: Press this button

to silence the system.

Press it again to turn on

the sound.

VOL: Press the up or

down arrow to increase or

decrease volume.

3-45

Understanding Radio Reception

The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,

especially at night. The longer range, however, can

cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can

pick up noise from things like storms and power lines.

Try reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you

ever get it.

FM Stereo

FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals

will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall

buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing

the sound to come and go.

Tips About Your Audio System

Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable

until it is too late. Your hearing can adapt to higher

volumes of sound. Sound that seems normal can be

loud and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions by

adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe

sound level before your hearing adapts to it.

To help avoid hearing loss or damage:

Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting.

Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably

and clearly.

NOTICE:

Before you add any sound equipment to your

vehicle -- like a tape player, CB radio, mobile

telephone or two-way radio -- be sure you

can add what you want. If you can, it’s very

important to do it properly. Added sound

equipment may interfere with the operation of

your vehicle’s engine, Delphi Delco Electronics

radio or other systems, and even damage them.

Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with the

operation of sound equipment that has been

added improperly.

So, before adding sound equipment, check with

your dealer and be sure to check Federal rules

covering mobile radio and telephone units.

3-46

Care of Your Cassette Tape Player

A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause

reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damaged

mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their

cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and

extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate

properly or may cause failure of the tape player.

Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every

50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLN to indicate

that you have used your tape player for 50 hours without

resetting the tape clean timer. If this message appears

on the display, your cassette tape player needs to be

cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as

soon as possible to prevent damage to your tapes and

player. If you notice a reduction in sound quality, try a

known good cassette to see if it is the tape or the tape

player at fault. If this other cassette has no improvement

in sound quality, clean the tape player.

The recommended cleaning method for your

cassette tape player is the use of a scrubbing action,

non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub

the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn.

The recommended cleaning cassette is available through

your dealer (GM Part No. 12344789).

When using a scrubbing action, non-abrasive cleaning

cassette, it is normal for the cassette to eject because

your unit is equipped with a broken tape detection

feature and a cleaning cassette may appear as a broken

tape. To prevent the cleaning cassette from being

ejected, use the following steps.

3-47

If your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FM Stereo with

Cassette Tape Player:

1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.

2. Turn the radio on.

3. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.

4. Within five seconds, press and hold the REV and

FWD buttons at the same time for three seconds.

The tape symbol on the display will flash, showing

that the broken tape detection feature is no

longer active.

5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s

recommended cleaning time.

If your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FM Stereo with

Cassette Tape Player and Automatic Tone Control:

1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.

2. Turn the radio off.

3. Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for five

seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash

for two seconds.

4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.

5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s

recommended cleaning time.

When the cleaning cassette has been ejected, the broken

tape detection feature is active again.

You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type

cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean

the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will not

eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner may

not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner.

The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type cleaning

cassette is not recommended.

After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for

five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will

display --- to show the indicator was reset.

Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality

may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette

tape is in good condition before you have your tape

player serviced.

3-48

Care of Your Compact Discs

Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases

or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight

and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a

clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution

and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.

Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling

discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the

edge of the hole and the outer edge.

Care of Your Compact Disc Player

The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised, due to

the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with

lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.

Fixed Mast Antenna

The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes

without being damaged. If the mast should ever become

slightly bent, you can straighten it out by hand. If the

mast is badly bent, as it might be by vandals, you should

replace it.

Check every once in a while to be sure the mast is still

tightened to the fender.

4- 4-1

Section 4 Your Driving and the Road

Here you’ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions. We’ve also

included many other useful tips on driving.

4-2 Your Driving, the Road and Your Vehicle

4-3 Defensive Driving

4-4 Drunken Driving

4-7 Control of a Vehicle

4-7 Braking

4-10 Steering

4-12 Off-Road Recovery

4-13 Passing

4-14 Loss of Control

4-15 Off-Road Driving with Your

Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle

4-29 Driving at Night

4-30 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

4-33 City Driving

4-34 Freeway Driving

4-35 Before Leaving on a Long Trip

4-36 Highway Hypnosis

4-36 Hill and Mountain Roads

4-38 Winter Driving

4-41 Recreational Vehicle Towing

4-43 Loading Your Vehicle

4-46 Towing a Trailer

4-2

Your Driving, the Road and

Your Vehicle

Whenever we drive, we’re taking on an important

responsibility. This is true for any motor

vehicle -- passenger car, van, truck or sport utility.

Driver behavior, the driving environment, and the

vehicle’s design all affect how well a vehicle performs.

But statistics show that the most important factor,

by far, is how we drive. Knowing how these three

factors work together can help you understand how

your vehicle handles and what you can do to avoid

many types of crashes, including a rollover crash.

Driver Behavior

The single most important thing is this: everyone in

the vehicle, including the driver, should buckle up.

See “Safety Belts” in the Index. In fact, most

serious injuries and fatalities to unbelted occupants

can be reduced or prevented by the use of safety belts.

In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly

more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.

In addition, avoiding excessive speed, sudden or abrupt

turns and drunken or aggressive driving can help make

trips safer and avoid the possibility of a crash, especially

a rollover crash. This section provides many useful tips

to help you drive more safely.

4-3

Driving Environment

You can also help avoid a rollover or other type of crash

by being prepared for driving in inclement weather, at

night, or during other times where visibility or traction

may be limited (such as on curves, slippery roads or

hilly terrain). Unfamiliar surroundings can also have

hidden hazards. To help you learn more about driving

in different conditions, this section contains information

about city, freeway, and off-road driving, as well as

other hints for driving in various weather conditions.

Vehicle Design

According to the U.S. Department of Transportation,

utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate

than other types of vehicles. Utility vehicles do have

a higher ground clearance and a narrower track or

shorter wheelbase than passenger cars to make them

more capable for off-road driving. Specific design

characteristics like these give the driver a better view of

the road, but also give utility vehicles a higher center of

gravity than other types of vehicles. This means that you

shouldn’t expect a utility vehicle to handle the same way

a vehicle with a lower center of gravity, like a car, would

in similar situations.

But driver behavior factors are far more often the cause

of a utility vehicle rollover than are environmental or

vehicle factors. Safe driver behavior and understanding

the environment in which you’ll be driving can help

avoid a rollover crash in any type of vehicle, including

utility vehicles.

Defensive Driving

The best advice anyone can give about driving is:

Drive defensively.

Please start with a very important safety device in your

vehicle: Buckle up. See “Safety Belts” in the Index.

Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”

On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means

“always expect the unexpected.”

Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to

be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they

might do. Be ready for their mistakes.

Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable

of accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough

following distance. It’s the best defensive driving

maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never

know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake

or turn suddenly.

4-4

Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on

the driving task. Anything that distracts from the driving

task -- such as concentrating on a cellular telephone call,

reading, or reaching for something on the floor -- makes

proper defensive driving more difficult and can even

cause a collision, with resulting injury. Ask a passenger to

help do things like this, or pull off the road in a safe place

to do them yourself. These simple defensive driving

techniques could save your life.

Drunken Driving

Death and injury associated with drinking and driving

is a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor to

the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims

every year.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to

drive a vehicle:

Judgment

Muscular Coordination

Vision

Attentiveness.

Police records show that almost half of all motor

vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,

these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking

and driving.

In recent years, about 16,000 annual motor

vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the

use of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured.

Many adults -- by some estimates, nearly half the

adult population -- choose never to drink alcohol,

so they never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,

it’s against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.

There are good medical, psychological and

developmental reasons for these laws.

The obvious way to solve the leading highway safety

problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then

drive. But what if people do? How much is “too much”

if the driver plans to drive? It’s a lot less than many might

think. Although it depends on each person and situation,

here is some general information on the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone

who is drinking depends upon four things:

The amount of alcohol consumed

The drinker’s body weight

The amount of food that is consumed before and

during drinking

The length of time it has taken the drinker to

consume the alcohol.

4-5

According to the American Medical Association, a

180-lb. (82 kg) person who drinks three 12-ounce

(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a

BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the

same BAC by drinking three 4-ounce (120 ml) glasses

of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces

(45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.

It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,

if the same person drank three double martinis

(3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour,

the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent.

A person who consumes food just before or during

drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.

There is a gender difference, too. Women generally

have a lower relative percentage of body water than

men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this means

that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC level

than a man of her same body weight when each has the

same number of drinks.

The law in many U.S. states sets the legal limit at a BAC

of 0.10 percent. In a growing number of U.S. states, and

throughout Canada, the limit is 0.08 percent. In some

other countries, it’s even lower. The BAC limit for all

commercial drivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to

six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen,

it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks,

and how quickly the person drinks them.

4-6

But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC

of 0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills

of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching

0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at

night. All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above

0.05 percent. Statistics show that the chance of being

in a collision increases sharply for drivers who have a

BAC of 0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC

level of 0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of

having a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent,

the chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times

greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, the chance is

25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol

in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold

showers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the

right answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to

take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?

A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able

to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.

There’s something else about drinking and driving that

many people don’t know. Medical research shows that

alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries

worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord or

heart. This means that when anyone who has been

drinking -- driver or passenger -- is in a crash, that

person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled

is higher than if the person had not been drinking.

CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.

Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and

judgment can be affected by even a small amount

of alcohol. You can have a serious -- or even

fatal -- collision if you drive after drinking.

Please don’t drink and drive or ride with a

driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a

cab; or if you’re with a group, designate a driver

who will not drink.

4-7

Control of a Vehicle

You have three systems that make your vehicle go where

you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and

the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work

at the places where the tires meet the road.

Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s

easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires

and road can provide. That means you can lose control

of your vehicle.

Braking

Braking action involves perception time and

reaction time.

First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.

That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up

your foot and do it. That’s reaction time.

Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second.

But that’s only an average. It might be less with one

driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with

another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination

and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and

frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle

moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m).

That could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so

keeping enough space between your vehicle and others

is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly

with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement or

gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire

tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of the

vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.

4-8

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive

in spurts -- heavy acceleration followed by heavy

braking -- rather than keeping pace with traffic.

This is a mistake. Your brakes may not have time

to cool between hard stops. Your brakes will wear

out much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking.

If you keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic

following distances, you will eliminate a lot of

unnecessary braking. That means better braking

and longer brake life.

If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake

normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do,

the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine

stops, you will still have some power brake assist.

But you will use it when you brake. Once the power

assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and the

brake pedal will be harder to push.

Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)

Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes (ABS). ABS is

an advanced electronic braking system that will help

prevent a braking skid.

When you start your engine and begin to drive away,

your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You may

hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test

is going on. This is normal.

If there’s a problem with

the anti-lock brake system,

this warning light will stay

on. See “Anti-Lock Brake

System Warning Light” in

the Index.

4-9

Here’s how anti-lock works. Let’s say the road is wet.

You’re driving safely. Suddenly an animal jumps out

in front of you.

You slam on the brakes and continue braking.

Here’s what happens with ABS.

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.

If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the

computer will separately work the brakes at each

front wheel and at both rear wheels.

The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure

faster than any driver could. The computer is

programmed to make the most of available tire and

road conditions. This can help you steer around the

obstacle while braking hard.

4-10

As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on

wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.

Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need

to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease

stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in

front of you, you won’t have time to apply your brakes

if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave

enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have

anti-lock brakes.

Using Anti-Lock

Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down

firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel

the brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise,

but this is normal.

Braking in Emergencies

With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same

time. In many emergencies, steering can help you

more than even the very best braking.

Steering

Power Steering

If you lose power steering assist because the engine

stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer

but it will take much more effort.

Steering Tips

Driving on Curves

It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned

on the news happen on curves. Here’s why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject

to the same laws of physics when driving on curves.

The traction of the tires against the road surface makes it

possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn

the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia will keep

the vehicle going in the same direction. If you’ve ever

tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll understand this.

The traction you can get in a curve depends on the

condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at

which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you’re

in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.

4-11

Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve. Then you

suddenly accelerate. Both control systems -- steering and

acceleration -- have to do their work where the tires meet

the road. Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too

much of those places. You can lose control.

What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on

the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you want

it to go, and slow down.

Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should

adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are

based on good weather and road conditions. Under less

favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a

curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front

wheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through

the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait

to accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then

accelerate gently into the straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies

There are times when steering can be more effective

than braking. For example, you come over a hill and

find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls

out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between

parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can

avoid these problems by braking -- if you can stop

in time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room.

That’s the time for evasive action -- steering around

the problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies

like these. First apply your brakes. See “Braking in

Emergencies” earlier in this section. It is better to

remove as much speed as you can from a possible

collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left

or right depending on the space available.

4-12

An emergency like this requires close attention and a

quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at

the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can

turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing

either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly,

and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have

avoided the object.

The fact that such emergency situations are always

possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving

at all times and wear safety belts properly.

Off-Road Recovery

You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the

edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the

pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the

accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer

so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.

You can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn

until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge.

Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down

the roadway.

4-13

Passing

The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a

two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,

accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes

back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane

highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the

passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming

traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in

judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger

can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the

worst of all traffic accidents -- the head-on collision.

So here are some tips for passing:

“Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides

and to crossroads for situations that might affect your

passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever

about making a successful pass, wait for a better time.

Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines.

If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a

turn or an intersection, delay your pass. A broken center

line usually indicates it’s all right to pass (providing the

road ahead is clear). Never cross a solid line on your side

of the lane or a double solid line, even if the road seems

empty of approaching traffic.

Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass

while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For one thing,

following too closely reduces your area of vision,

especially if you’re following a larger vehicle.

Also, you won’t have adequate space if the vehicle

ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a

reasonable distance.

When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,

start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and

don’t get too close. Time your move so you will be

increasing speed as the time comes to move into the

other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have

a “running start” that more than makes up for the

distance you would lose by dropping back. And if

something happens to cause you to cancel your pass,

you need only slow down and drop back again and

wait for another opportunity.

If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait

your turn. But take care that someone isn’t trying to

pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle.

Remember to glance over your shoulder and check

the blind spot.

4-14

Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder and

start your left lane change signal before moving out

of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough

ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your

inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal

and move back into the right lane. (Remember that

your right outside mirror is convex. The vehicle you

just passed may seem to be farther away from you

than it really is.)

Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time

on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the

next vehicle.

Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.

Even though the brake lamps are not flashing,

it may be slowing down or starting to turn.

If you’re being passed, make it easy for the

following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps

you can ease a little to the right.

Loss of Control

Let’s review what driving experts say about what happens

when the three control systems (brakes, steering and

acceleration) don’t have enough friction where the tires

meet the road to do what the driver has asked.

In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer and

constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger.

Skidding

In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.

Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable

care suited to existing conditions, and by not “overdriving”

those conditions. But skids are always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s

three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels

aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too

much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip

and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid,

too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.

A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are best

handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.

4-15

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the

accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want

the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,

your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a

second skid if it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,

gravel or other material is on the road. For safety,

you’ll want to slow down and adjust your driving to

these conditions. It is important to slow down on

slippery surfaces because stopping distance will be

longer and vehicle control more limited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction,

try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration

or braking (including engine braking by shifting to a

lower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires

to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until

your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning

clues -- such as enough water, ice or packed snow on

the road to make a “mirrored surface” -- and slow

down when you have any doubt.

Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps

avoid only the braking skid.

Off-Road Driving with Your

Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle

This off-road guide is for vehicles that have

four-wheel drive.

Also, see “Anti-Lock Brakes” in the Index.

If your vehicle doesn’t have four-wheel drive, you

shouldn’t drive off-road unless you’re on a level,

solid surface.

Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does have

some definite hazards. The greatest of these is the

terrain itself.

“Off-roading” means you’ve left the great North

American road system behind. Traffic lanes aren’t

marked. Curves aren’t banked. There are no road signs.

Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill or downhill.

In short, you’ve gone right back to nature.

Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that’s

why it’s very important that you read this guide. You’ll

find many driving tips and suggestions. These will help

make your off-road driving safer and more enjoyable.

4-16

Before You Go Off-Roading

There are some things to do before you go out.

For example, be sure to have all necessary maintenance

and service work done. Check to make sure all

underbody shields (if so equipped) are properly

attached. Be sure you read all the information about

your four-wheel-drive vehicle in this manual. Is there

enough fuel? Is the spare tire fully inflated? Are the

fluid levels up where they should be? What are the local

laws that apply to off-roading where you’ll be driving?

If you don’t know, you should check with law

enforcement people in the area. Will you be on

someone’s private land? If so, be sure to get the

necessary permission.

Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road Driving

There are some important things to remember about

how to load your vehicle.

The heaviest things should be on the load floor and

forward of your rear axle. Put heavier items as far

forward as you can.

Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving on

the off-road terrain doesn’t toss things around.

CAUTION:

Cargo on the load floor piled higher than the

seatbacks can be thrown forward during a

sudden stop. You or your passengers could

be injured. Keep cargo below the top of

the seatbacks.

Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be

tossed about when driving over rough

terrain. You or your passengers can be struck

by flying objects. Secure the cargo properly.

Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’s

center of gravity, making it more likely to roll

over. You can be seriously or fatally injured if

the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy loads inside

the cargo area, not on the roof. Keep cargo

in the cargo area as far forward and low

as possible.

You’ll find other important information in this manual.

See “Vehicle Loading,” “Luggage Carrier” and “Tires”

in the Index.

4-17

Environmental Concerns

Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying

recreation. However, it also raises environmental

concerns. GM recognizes these concerns and urges

every off-roader to follow these basic rules for

protecting the environment:

Always use established trails, roads and areas that

have been specially set aside for public off-road

recreational driving; obey all posted regulations.

Avoid any driving practice that could damage the

environment -- shrubs, flowers, trees, grasses -- or

disturb wildlife (this includes wheel-spinning,

breaking down trees or unnecessary driving through

streams or over soft ground).

Always carry a litter bag . . . make sure all refuse is

removed from any campsite before leaving.

Take extreme care with open fires (where permitted),

camp stoves and lanterns.

Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other

combustible materials that could catch fire from

the heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system.

Traveling to Remote Areas

It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when

going to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your

route. You are much less likely to get bad surprises.

Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Try to learn of

any blocked or closed roads.

It’s also a good idea to travel with at least one other

vehicle. If something happens to one of them,

the other can help quickly.

Does your vehicle have a winch? If so, be sure to read

the winch instructions. In a remote area, a winch can be

handy if you get stuck. But you’ll want to know how to

use it properly.

Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving

It’s a good idea to practice in an area that’s safe and

close to home before you go into the wilderness.

Off-road driving does require some new and different

driving skills. Here’s what we mean.

Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your

eyes, for example, need to constantly sweep the terrain

for unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to listen for

unusual tire or engine sounds. With your arms, hands,

feet and body, you’ll need to respond to vibrations and

vehicle bounce.

4-18

Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful

off-road driving. One of the best ways to control your

vehicle is to control your speed. Here are some things to

keep in mind. At higher speeds:

you approach things faster and you have less time

to scan the terrain for obstacles.

you have less time to react.

you have more vehicle bounce when you drive

over obstacles.

you’ll need more distance for braking, especially

since you’re on an unpaved surface.

CAUTION:

When you’re driving off-road, bouncing and

quick changes in direction can easily throw you

out of position. This could cause you to lose

control and crash. So, whether you’re driving on

or off the road, you and your passengers should

wear safety belts.

Scanning the Terrain

Off-road driving can take you over many different kinds

of terrain. You need to be familiar with the terrain and its

many different features. Here are some things to consider.

Surface Conditions. Off-roading can take you over

hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud,

snow or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering,

acceleration and braking of your vehicle in different

ways. Depending upon the kind of surface you are on,

you may experience slipping, sliding, wheel spinning,

delayed acceleration, poor traction and longer

braking distances.

Surface Obstacles. Unseen or hidden obstacles can be

hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut or bump can startle you

if you’re not prepared for them. Often these obstacles are

hidden by grass, bushes, snow or even the rise and fall of

the terrain itself. Here are some things to consider:

Is the path ahead clear?

Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?

Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?

(There’s more discussion of these subjects later.)

Will you have to stop suddenly or change

direction quickly?

4-19

When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain, keep a

firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs or other

surface features can jerk the wheel out of your hands

if you’re not prepared.

When you drive over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles,

your wheels can leave the ground. If this happens,

even with one or two wheels, you can’t control the

vehicle as well or at all.

Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it’s

especially important to avoid sudden acceleration,

sudden turns or sudden braking.

In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind of

alertness from driving on paved roads and highways.

There are no road signs, posted speed limits or signal

lights. You have to use your own good judgment

about what is safe and what isn’t.

Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any

road. And this is certainly true for off-road driving.

At the very time you need special alertness and driving

skills, your reflexes, perceptions and judgment can be

affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You could

have a serious -- or even fatal -- accident if you drink

and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking.

See “Drunken Driving” in the Index.

Driving on Off-Road Hills

Off-road driving often takes you up, down or across

a hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment

and an understanding of what your vehicle can and can’t

do. There are some hills that simply can’t be driven,

no matter how well built the vehicle.

CAUTION:

Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle.

If you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive

down them, you can’t control your speed. If you

drive across them, you will roll over. You could be

seriously injured or killed. If you have any doubt

about the steepness, don’t drive the hill.

Approaching a Hill

When you approach a hill, you need to decide if it’s one

of those hills that’s just too steep to climb, descend or

cross. Steepness can be hard to judge.

4-20

On a very small hill, for example, there may be a

smooth, constant incline with only a small change in

elevation where you can easily see all the way to the top.

On a large hill, the incline may get steeper as you near

the top, but you may not see this because the crest of the

hill is hidden by bushes, grass or shrubs.

Here are some other things to consider as you

approach a hill.

Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get

sharply steeper in places?

Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the

surface cause tire slipping?

Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you

won’t have to make turning maneuvers?

Are there obstructions on the hill that can block

your path (boulders, trees, logs or ruts)?

What’s beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an embankment,

a drop-off, a fence? Get out and walk the hill if you

don’t know. It’s the smart way to find out.

Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have

ruts, gullies, troughs and exposed rocks because

they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.

Driving Uphill

Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill,

you need to take some special steps.

Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the

steering wheel.

Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain

your speed. Don’t use more power than you need,

because you don’t want your wheels to start spinning

or sliding.

Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible.

If the path twists and turns, you might want to find

another route.

CAUTION:

Turning or driving across steep hills can be

dangerous. You could lose traction, slide sideways,

and possibly roll over. You could be seriously

injured or killed. When driving up hills, always

try to go straight up.

4-21

Ease up on your speed as you approach the top

of the hill.

Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more visible

to approaching traffic on trails or hills.

Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill

to let opposing traffic know you’re there.

Use your headlamps even during the day. They make

you more visible to oncoming traffic.

CAUTION:

Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed

can cause an accident. There could be a drop-off,

embankment, cliff, or even another vehicle.

You could be seriously injured or killed. As you

near the top of a hill, slow down and stay alert.

Q: What should I do if my vehicle stalls, or is

about to stall, and I can’t make it up the hill?

A: If this happens, there are some things you should

do, and there are some things you must not do.

First, here’s what you should do:

Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and

keep it from rolling backwards. Also, apply the

parking brake.

If your engine is still running, shift the transmission

to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and

slowly back down the hill in REVERSE (R).

If your engine has stopped running, you’ll need

to restart it. With the brake pedal pressed and the

parking brake still applied, shift the transmission

to PARK (P) (or, shift to NEUTRAL (N) if your

vehicle has a manual transmission) and restart the

engine. Then, shift to REVERSE (R), release the

parking brake, and slowly back down the hill as

straight as possible in REVERSE (R).

4-22

As you are backing down the hill, put your left hand

on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position.

This way, you’ll be able to tell if your wheels are

straight and maneuver as you back down. It’s best

that you back down the hill with your wheels straight

rather than in the left or right direction. Turning the

wheel too far to the left or right will increase the

possibility of a rollover.

Here are some things you must not do if you stall, or are

about to stall, when going up a hill.

Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into

NEUTRAL (N) (or depressing the clutch, if you

have a manual transmission) to “rev-up” the

engine and regain forward momentum. This won’t

work. Your vehicle will roll backwards very quickly

and you could go out of control.

Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the

vehicle. Then apply the parking brake. Shift to

REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and

slowly back straight down.

Never attempt to turn around if you are about to

stall when going up a hill. If the hill is steep enough

to stall your vehicle, it’s steep enough to cause you

to roll over if you turn around. If you can’t make it

up the hill, you must back straight down the hill.

Q: Suppose, after stalling, I try to back down

the hill and decide I just can’t do it.

What should I do?

A: Set the parking brake, put your transmission

in PARK (P) (or the manual transmission in

FIRST (1)) and turn off the engine. Leave the

vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill

side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would

take if it rolled downhill. Do not shift the transfer

case to NEUTRAL when you leave the vehicle.

Leave it in some gear.

4-23

CAUTION:

Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can

cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission

is in PARK (P) (or, if you have the manual

transmission, even if you’re in gear). This is

because the NEUTRAL position on the transfer

case overrides the transmission. You or someone

else could be injured. If you are going to leave

your vehicle, set the parking brake and shift the

transmission to PARK (P) (or, put your manual

transmission in FIRST (1)). But do not shift the

transfer case to NEUTRAL. Leave the transfer

case in a drive gear.

Driving Downhill

When off-roading takes you downhill, you’ll want to

consider a number of things:

How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to

maintain vehicle control?

What’s the surface like? Smooth? Rough?

Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?

Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts?

Logs? Boulders?

What’s at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden

creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks?

If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then try to

keep your vehicle headed straight down, and use a low

gear. This way, engine drag can help your brakes and

they won’t have to do all the work. Descend slowly,

keeping your vehicle under control at all times.

4-24

CAUTION:

Heavy braking when going down a hill can cause

your brakes to overheat and fade. This could cause

loss of control and a serious accident. Apply the

brakes lightly when descending a hill and use a

low gear to keep vehicle speed under control.

Q: Are there some things I should not do

when driving down a hill?

A: Yes! These are important because if you ignore

them you could lose control and have a

serious accident.

When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you

across the incline of the hill. A hill that’s not too

steep to drive down may be too steep to drive across.

You could roll over if you don’t drive straight down.

Never go downhill with the transmission in

NEUTRAL (N), or with the clutch pedal

pressed down in a manual shift. This is called

“free-wheeling.” Your brakes will have to do

all the work and could overheat and fade.

Q: Am I likely to stall when going downhill?

A: It’s much more likely to happen going uphill.

But if it happens going downhill, here’s what to do.

Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes.

Apply the parking brake.

Shift to PARK (P) (or to NEUTRAL (N) with the

manual transmission) and, while still braking, restart

the engine.

Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake,

and drive straight down.

If the engine won’t start, get out and get help.

4-25

Driving Across an Incline

Sooner or later, an off-road trail will probably go across

the incline of a hill. If this happens, you have to decide

whether to try to drive across the incline. Here are some

things to consider:

A hill that can be driven straight up or down

may be too steep to drive across. When you go

straight up or down a hill, the length of the wheel

base (the distance from the front wheels to the

rear wheels) reduces the likelihood the vehicle will

tumble end over end. But when you drive across

an incline, the much more narrow track width

(the distance between the left and right wheels)

may not prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling

over. Also, driving across an incline puts more

weight on the downhill wheels. This could cause

a downhill slide or a rollover.

Surface conditions can be a problem when you drive

across a hill. Loose gravel, muddy spots, or even wet

grass can cause your tires to slip sideways, downhill.

If the vehicle slips sideways, it can hit something

that will trip it (a rock, a rut, etc.) and roll over.

Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the

incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with

the uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into

a rut or depression, your vehicle can tilt even more.

For reasons like these, you need to decide carefully

whether to try to drive across an incline. Just because

the trail goes across the incline doesn’t mean you

have to drive it. The last vehicle to try it might have

rolled over.

CAUTION:

Driving across an incline that’s too steep will

make your vehicle roll over. You could be seriously

injured or killed. If you have any doubt about

the steepness of the incline, don’t drive across it.

Find another route instead.

4-26

Q: What if I’m driving across an incline that’s not

too steep, but I hit some loose gravel and start to

slide downhill. What should I do?

A: If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways,

turn downhill. This should help straighten out the

vehicle and prevent the side slipping. However, a

much better way to prevent this is to get out and

“walk the course” so you know what the surface

is like before you drive it.

Stalling on an Incline

If your vehicle stalls when you’re crossing an incline,

be sure you (and your passengers) get out on the uphill

side, even if the door there is harder to open. If you get

out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll

over, you’ll be right in its path.

If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path

the vehicle will take if it does roll over. CAUTION:

Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a vehicle

stopped across an incline is dangerous. If the

vehicle rolls over, you could be crushed or killed.

Always get out on the uphill (high) side of the

vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path.

4-27

Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow or Ice

When you drive in mud, snow or sand, your wheels

won’t get good traction. You can’t accelerate as quickly,

turning is more difficult, and you’ll need longer

braking distances.

It’s best to use a low gear when you’re in mud -- the

deeper the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep mud,

the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you don’t

get stuck.

When you drive on sand, you’ll sense a change in wheel

traction. But it will depend upon how loosely packed the

sand is. On loosely packed sand (as on beaches or sand

dunes) your tires will tend to sink into the sand. This has

an effect on steering, accelerating and braking. You may

want to reduce the air pressure in your tires slightly

when driving on sand. This will improve traction.

Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction.

On these surfaces, it’s very easy to lose control. On wet

ice, for example, the traction is so poor that you will

have difficulty accelerating. And if you do get moving,

poor steering and difficult braking can cause you to slide

out of control.

CAUTION:

Driving on frozen lakes, ponds or rivers can be

dangerous. Underwater springs, currents under

the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken the ice.

Your vehicle could fall through the ice and you

and your passengers could drown. Drive your

vehicle on safe surfaces only.

Driving in Water

Light rain causes no special off-road driving problems.

But heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood

waters demand extreme caution.

Find out how deep the water is before you drive through

it. If it’s deep enough to cover your wheel hubs, axles or

exhaust pipe, don’t try it -- you probably won’t get

through. Also, water that deep can damage your axle

and other vehicle parts.

4-28

If the water isn’t too deep, then drive through it slowly.

At fast speeds, water splashes on your ignition system

and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can also occur if you

get your tailpipe under water. And, as long as your

tailpipe is under water, you’ll never be able to start your

engine. When you go through water, remember that

when your brakes get wet, it may take you longer to stop.

CAUTION:

Driving through rushing water can be dangerous.

Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream

and you and your passengers could drown.

If it’s only shallow water, it can still wash away

the ground from under your tires, and you could

lose traction and roll the vehicle over. Don’t drive

through rushing water.

See “Driving Through Water” in the Index for more

information on driving through water.

After Off-Road Driving

Remove any brush or debris that has collected on

the underbody, chassis or under the hood.

These accumulations can be a fire hazard.

After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings

cleaned and checked. These substances can cause

glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure,

steering, suspension, wheels, tires and exhaust system

for damage. Also, check the fuel lines and cooling

system for any leakage.

Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to

off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for

additional information.

4-29

Driving at Night

Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. One

reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired -- by

alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.

Drive defensively.

Don’t drink and drive.

Except Vehicles with Electrochromic Day/Night

Inside Rearview Mirror: Adjust your inside

rearview mirror to reduce the glare from

headlamps behind you.

Since you can’t see as well, you may need to

slow down and keep more space between you

and other vehicles.

Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your

headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.

In remote areas, watch for animals.

If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place

and rest.

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as

we get older these differences increase. A 50-year-old

driver may require at least twice as much light to see the

same thing at night as a 20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect your night

vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright

sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes

will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re

driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may cut

down on glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot

of things invisible.

4-30

You can be temporarily blinded by approaching

headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even

several seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark.

When you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver

who doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle with

misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring

directly into the approaching headlamps.

Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle

clean -- inside and out. Glare at night is made much

worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass

can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes

lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,

making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a

roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your

eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly

lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be

checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes

be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night

blindness -- the inability to see in dim light -- and

aren’t even aware of it.

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet

road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well because

your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on dry roads.

And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get

even less traction. It’s always wise to go slower and

be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving.

The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes

are tuned for driving on dry pavement.

4-31

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your

windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain

can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals,

pavement markings, the edge of the road and even

people walking.

It’s wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape

and keep your windshield washer tank filled with washer

fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts when they

show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield,

or when strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts.

Driving too fast through large water puddles or even

going through some car washes can cause problems, too.

The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles.

But if you can’t, try to slow down before you hit them.

CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won’t work

as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to

one side. You could lose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle of water or

a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until

your brakes work normally.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up

under your tires that they can actually ride on the water.

This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re

going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning,

it has little or no contact with the road.

4-32

Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if your

tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or

more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on

the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone

poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the

water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.

There just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.

The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.

Driving Through Deep Standing Water

NOTICE:

If you drive too quickly through deep puddles

or standing water, water can come in through

your engine’s air intake and badly damage your

engine. Never drive through water that is slightly

lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If you

can’t avoid deep puddles or standing water, drive

through them very slowly.

Driving Through Flowing Water

CAUTION:

Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.

If you try to drive through flowing water, as you

might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can

be carried away. As little as six inches of flowing

water can carry away a smaller vehicle. If this

happens, you and the other vehicle occupants

could drown. Don’t ignore police warning signs,

and otherwise be very cautious about trying to

drive through flowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, allow some extra following

distance. And be especially careful when you pass

another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room

ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted

by road spray.

Have good tires with proper tread depth.

See “Tires” in the Index.

4-33

City Driving

One of the biggest problems with city streets is the

amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch out for

what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to

traffic signals.

Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:

Know the best way to get to where you are

going. Get a city map and plan your trip into an

unknown part of the city just as you would for a

cross-country trip.

Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross

most large cities. You’ll save time and energy.

See the next part, “Freeway Driving.”

Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic light

is there because the corner is busy enough to need it.

When a light turns green, and just before you start

to move, check both ways for vehicles that have

not cleared the intersection or may be running the

red light.

4-34

Freeway Driving

Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,

expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the safest

of all roads. But they have their own special rules.

The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep

up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same

speed most of the other drivers are driving. Too-fast or

too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the

left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the

freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you

drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to

check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to

blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close

to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal,

check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as

often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the

traffic flow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to

the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower.

Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.

Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use

your turn signal.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over

your shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle

in your “blind” spot.

Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you

allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move

slightly slower at night.

When you want to leave the freeway, move to the

proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit,

do not, under any circumstances, stop and back up.

Drive on to the next exit.

4-35

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.

The exit speed is usually posted.

Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not

to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance

at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are going

slower than you actually are.

Before Leaving on a Long Trip

Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If you

must start when you’re not fresh -- such as after a day’s

work -- don’t plan to make too many miles that first part

of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you

can easily drive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it

serviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needs

service, have it done before starting out. Of course,

you’ll find experienced and able service experts in

GM dealerships all across North America. They’ll be

ready and willing to help if you need it.

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?

Are all windows clean inside and outside?

Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?

Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked

all levels?

Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?

Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,

trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for

long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to

the recommended pressure?

Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook

along your route? Should you delay your trip a

short time to avoid a major storm system?

Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

4-36

Highway Hypnosis

Is there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”?

Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it

highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.

There is something about an easy stretch of road with

the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on

the road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the

wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy.

Don’t let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can

leave the road in less than a second, and you could

crash and be injured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis?

First, be aware that it can happen.

Then here are some tips:

Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a

comfortably cool interior.

Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead

and to the sides. Check your mirrors and your

instruments frequently.

If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,

service or parking area and take a nap, get some

exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness on

the highway as an emergency.

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from

driving in flat or rolling terrain.

4-37

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re

planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make

your trips safer and more enjoyable. See “Off-Road

Driving” in the Index for information about

driving off-road.

Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid

levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system

and transmission. These parts can work hard on

mountain roads.

Know how to go down hills. The most important

thing to know is this: let your engine do some of

the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you

go down a steep or long hill.

CAUTION:

If you don’t shift down, your brakes could get so

hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would then

have poor braking or even none going down a hill.

You could crash. Shift down to let your engine

assist your brakes on a steep downhill slope.

CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the

ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have to

do all the work of slowing down. They could get so

hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would then

have poor braking or even none going down a hill.

You could crash. Always have your engine running

and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill.

Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down to

a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine and

transmission, and you can climb the hill better.

Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane

roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or cut

across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let

you stay in your own lane.

As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could be

something in your lane, like a stalled car or an accident.

You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of

special problems. Examples are long grades, passing or

no-passing zones, a falling rocks area or winding roads.

Be alert to these and take appropriate action.

4-38

Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

You may want to put winter emergency supplies in

your vehicle.

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply

of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer

clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and

reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be driving

under severe conditions, include a small bag of sand, a

piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags to help

provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these

items in your vehicle.

Driving on Snow or Ice

Most of the time, those places where your tires meet

the road probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and

the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You’ll

have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be

very careful.

4-39

What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold

snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet

ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the

least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s about

freezing (32 F; 0 C) and freezing rain begins to fall.

Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews

can get there.

Whatever the condition -- smooth ice, packed, blowing

or loose snow -- drive with caution.

Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction.

If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and

polish the surface under the tires even more.

Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability

when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even

though you have an anti-lock braking system, you’ll

want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry

pavement. See “Anti-Lock” in the Index.

Allow greater following distance on any

slippery road.

Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine

until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On an

otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in

shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around

clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.

Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass

may remain icy when the surrounding roads are

clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you,

brake before you are on it. Try not to brake while

you’re actually on the ice, and avoid sudden

steering maneuvers.

4-40

If You’re Caught in a Blizzard

If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a

serious situation. You should probably stay with your

vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help

and you can hike through the snow. Here are some

things to do to summon help and keep yourself and

your passengers safe:

Turn on your hazard flashers.

Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that

you’ve been stopped by the snow.

Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.

If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body

insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor

mats -- anything you can wrap around yourself or

tuck under your clothing to keep warm.

You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.

4-41

CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.

This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas

to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill

you. You can’t see it or smell it, so you might not

know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from

around the base of your vehicle, especially any

that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check

around again from time to time to be sure snow

doesn’t collect there.

Open a window just a little on the side of the

vehicle that’s away from the wind. This will

help keep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves

fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster

than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This

uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the

battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to

restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on

with your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.

Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost

all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again

and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable

from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the

fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get

out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises

every half hour or so until help comes.

Recreational Vehicle Towing

There may be times when you want to tow your vehicle

behind another vehicle for use at your destination.

Be sure to use the proper towing equipment designed

for recreational vehicle towing. Follow the instructions

for the towing equipment.

When towing your vehicle, turn the ignition to OFF.

To prevent your battery from draining while towing,

remove the RDO BATT and CLSTR fuses from the

instrument panel fuse block. Be sure to replace the fuses

when you reach your destination. See “Fuses and Circuit

Breakers” in the Index.

4-42

Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles and Vehicles

with the Electronic Shift Transfer Case

Two-wheel-drive vehicles and vehicles with the

Electronic Shift Transfer Case should not be towed

with all four wheels on the ground. These transmissions

have no provisions for internal lubrication while being

towed. To properly tow these vehicles, they should be

placed on a platform trailer with all four wheels off the

ground. Towing with all four wheels on the ground

should be avoided.

In rare cases when it’s unavoidable and your vehicle

has to be towed with all four wheels on the ground,

the propeller shaft to axle yoke orientation should be

marked and the propeller shaft removed following

the applicable service manual removal/installation

procedure. See “Service and Owner Publications” in

the Index.

Dust or dirt can enter the back of the transmission

through the opening created by removing the propeller

shaft if proper protection is not provided. Also, check

the transmission fluid level before driving the vehicle.

Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

(Automatic Transfer Case)

Use the following procedure to correctly tow your

vehicle on all four wheels:

1. Firmly set the parking brake.

2. Place the transmission in PARK (P).

3. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the

tow vehicle.

4-43

4. With the engine running, shift the transfer case to

NEUTRAL. See “Four-Wheel Drive” in the Index

for the proper procedure to select the NEUTRAL

position for your vehicle.

CAUTION:

Shifting the transfer case into NEUTRAL can

cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission

is in PARK (P), for an automatic transmission,

or if your vehicle is in gear, for a manual

transmission. You or others could be injured.

Make sure the parking brake is firmly set

before you shift the transfer case into NEUTRAL.

See “Four-Wheel Drive (Automatic Transfer Case)”

in the Index.

5. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle

being towed is firmly attached to the towing vehicle.

6. Turn the ignition to OFF. The OFF position unlocks

the steering column and reduces battery drain.

Unlocking the steering column will allow the proper

movement of the front wheels and tires during towing.

Loading Your Vehicle

The Certification/Tire label is found on the driver’s door

edge, above the door latch. The label shows the size of

your original tires and the inflation pressures needed to

obtain the gross weight capacity of your vehicle. This is

called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The

GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants,

fuel, cargo and trailer tongue weight, if pulling a trailer.

The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum

weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR).

4-44

To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles,

you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle.

Your dealer can help you with this. Be sure to spread out

your load equally on both sides of the centerline.

Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the GAWR

for either the front or rear axle.

If you do have a heavy load, you should spread it out.

Similar appearing vehicles may have different GVWRs

and payloads. Please note your vehicle’s Certification/Tire

label or consult your dealer for additional details.

CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the

GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear

GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can

break, and it can change the way your vehicle

handles. These could cause you to lose control

and crash. Also, overloading can shorten the life

of your vehicle.

Using heavier suspension components to get added

durability might not change your weight ratings.

Ask your dealer to help you load your vehicle the

right way.

NOTICE:

Your warranty does not cover parts or

components that fail because of overloading.

If you put things inside your vehicle -- like suitcases,

tools, packages, or anything else -- they will go as fast

as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly,

or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.

4-45

CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle can strike

and injure people in a sudden stop or turn,

or in a crash.

Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle.

Try to spread the weight evenly.

Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,

inside the vehicle so that some of them are

above the tops of the seats.

Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint

in your vehicle.

When you carry something inside the

vehicle, secure it whenever you can.

Don’t leave a seat folded down unless

you need to.

There’s also important loading information for off-road

driving in this manual. See “Loading Your Vehicle for

Off-Road Driving” in the Index.

Payload

The payload capacity is shown on the Certification/Tire

label. This is the maximum load capacity that your

vehicle can carry. Be sure to include the weight of the

occupants as part of your load. If you added any

accessories or equipment after your vehicle left the

factory, remember to subtract the weight of these things

from the payload. Your dealer can help you with this.

Electronic Level Control (If Equipped)

If your vehicle is equipped with the electronic level

control the rear of the vehicle is automatically kept

level as you load or unload your vehicle. However,

you should still not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR.

The ignition has to be on for the level control to work.

The system includes a small electric air compressor and

air-adjustable rear shock absorbers.

You may hear the compressor operating when you load

or unload your vehicle, and periodically as the system

self-adjusts. This is normal.

4-46

The compressor should operate for brief periods of time.

If the sound continues for an extended period of time,

your vehicle needs service. To keep your battery from

being drained, you may want to remove the LD LEV

fuse in the engine compartment fuse block until you

can get your vehicle serviced (see “Fuses and Circuit

Breakers” in the Index).

Using heavier suspension components to get added

durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask

your dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way.

Add-On Equipment

When you carry removable items, you may need to put a

limit on how many people you carry inside your vehicle.

Be sure to weigh your vehicle before you buy and install

the new equipment.

NOTICE:

Your warranty doesn’t cover parts or components

that fail because of overloading.

Towing a Trailer

CAUTION:

If you don’t use the correct equipment and drive

properly, you can lose control when you pull a

trailer. For example, if the trailer is too heavy,

the brakes may not work well -- or even at all.

You and your passengers could be seriously

injured. Pull a trailer only if you have followed

all the steps in this section. Ask your dealer for

advice and information about towing a trailer

with your vehicle.

4-47

NOTICE:

Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your

vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered

by your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly,

follow the advice in this part, and see your

dealer for important information about towing

a trailer with your vehicle. Additional rear axle

maintenance is required for a vehicle used to tow

a trailer. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services”

in the Index.

To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for

your vehicle, you should read the information in

“Weight of the Trailer” that appears later in

this section.

If yours was built with trailering options, as many are,

it’s ready for heavier trailers. But trailering is different

than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means

changes in handling, durability and fuel economy.

Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment,

and it has to be used properly.

That’s the reason for this part. In it are many

time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.

Many of these are important for your safety and that

of your passengers. So please read this section carefully

before you pull a trailer.

4-48

If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer

If you do, here are some important points:

There are many different laws, including speed limit

restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure

your rig will be legal, not only where you live but

also where you’ll be driving. A good source for this

information can be state or provincial police.

Consider using a sway control if your trailer will

weigh 2,000 lbs. (900 kg) or less. You should always

use a sway control if your trailer will weigh more

than 2,000 lbs. (900 kg). You can ask a hitch dealer

about sway controls.

Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles

(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,

axle or other parts could be damaged.

Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you

tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and

don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your

engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the

heavier loads.

If you have an automatic transmission, you can

use THIRD (3) (or, as you need to, a lower gear)

when towing a trailer. Operating your vehicle in

THIRD (3) when towing a trailer will minimize heat

buildup and extend the life of your transmission.

If you have a manual transmission and you are

towing a trailer, it’s better not to use FIFTH (5) gear.

Just drive in FOURTH (4) gear (or, as you need to,

a lower gear). See “Tow/Haul Mode” in the Index.

Three important considerations have to do with weight:

the weight of the trailer,

the weight of the trailer tongue

and the weight on your vehicle’s tires.

4-49

Tow/Haul Mode (V6 Engine, Automatic

Transmission Equipped Models) (If Equipped)

The tow/haul mode is a feature that assists when pulling

a heavy trailer. The purpose of the tow/haul mode is to

do the following:

Reduce the frequency of shifts when pulling a

heavy trailer,

provide the same shift feel when pulling a heavy

trailer as when the vehicle is unloaded, and

reduce the need to change throttle position when

pulling a heavy trailer.

This feature is turned on or off by pressing a button

on the floor console or the shift knob. When the feature

is on, a light located on the instrument panel cluster

will illuminate to indicate that the tow/haul mode has

been selected.

See “Tow/haul Mode Light” in the Index. The tow/haul

mode is automatically turned off each time the vehicle

is started.

The tow/haul mode is most effective when the vehicle

and trailer combined weight is at least 75% of the Gross

Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the maximum

trailer weight rating for the vehicle. See “Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating” and “Trailer Weight” in the Index.

The tow/haul mode for hauling a heavy trailer is most

useful under the following conditions:

When driving through hilly terrain at speeds

below 55 mph (88 km/h),

when driving in low speed or stop and go traffic

below 55 mph (88 km/h), and

when driving in parking lots.

Use the tow/haul mode instead of the previous

recommendation to shift to THIRD (3) gear to improve

fuel economy at highway speeds and shift performance

at lower speeds. Operating in the tow/haul mode when

not pulling a heavy trailer will not cause damage to the

vehicle, but you may experience reduced fuel economy

and undesirable performance from the engine and

transmission. The tow/haul mode should be used

only when pulling a heavy trailer.

4-50

Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For example,

speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and

how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all

important. And, it can also depend on any special

equipment that you have on your vehicle.

The following chart shows how much your trailer can

weigh, based upon your vehicle model and options.

Vehicle Axle

Ratio Max. Trailer Wt.

2-Wheel Drive,

2 Door

Auto. Trans.

3.08

3.42 4,700 lbs. (2 133 kg)

5,700 lbs. (2 587 kg)

2-Wheel Drive,

2 Door

Manual Trans.

3.42 4,200 lbs. (1 906 kg)

2-Wheel Drive,

4 Door

Auto. Trans.

3.08

3.42 4,500 lbs. (2 043 kg)

5,500 lbs. (2 497 kg)

4-Wheel Drive,

2 Door

Auto. Trans.

3.08

3.42

3.73

4,400 lbs. (1 997 kg)

5,400 lbs. (2 451 kg)

Vehicle Axle

Ratio Max. Trailer Wt.

4-Wheel Drive,

2 Door

Manual Trans.

3.42 3,900 lbs. (1 770 kg)

ZR2

Auto. Trans. 3.73 4,800 lbs. (2 179 kg)

Manual Trans. 3.73 4,300 lbs. (1 952 kg)

4-Wheel Drive,

4 Door

Auto. Trans.

3.08

3.42

3.73

4,200 lbs. (1 906 kg)

5,200 lbs. (2 360 kg)

4-Wheel Drive,

4 Door

Manual Trans.

3.42 3,700 lbs. (1 679 kg)

Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming the

driver and one passenger are in the tow vehicle and it

has all the required trailering equipment. The weight of

additional optional equipment, passengers and cargo in

the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the maximum

trailer weight. The weight of the trailer tongue also

affects the maximum trailer weight. See “Weight of the

Trailer Tongue” later in this section.

4-51

You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or

advice, or you can write us at the address listed in your

Warranty and Owner Assistance Information Booklet.

In Canada, write to:

General Motors of Canada Limited

Customer Communication Centre, 163-005

1908 Colonel Sam Drive

Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important

weight to measure because it affects the total or gross

weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight

(GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any

cargo you may carry in it, and the people who will be

riding in the vehicle. And if you will tow a trailer, you

must add the tongue load to the GVW because your

vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See “Loading

Your Vehicle” in the Index for more information about

your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.

If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer

tongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of the total loaded

trailer weight (B). If you’re using a weight-distributing

hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 12 percent of

the total loaded trailer weight (B).

After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and

then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are

proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them

right simply by moving some items around in the trailer.

4-52

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires

Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper

limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the

Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s door or

see “Tire Loading” in the Index. Then be sure you

don’t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle, including

the weight of the trailer tongue.

Hitches

It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.

Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are

a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here are

some rules to follow:

If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will

weigh more than 3,500 lbs. (1 589 kg), be sure to

use a properly mounted, weight-distributing hitch

and sway control of the proper size. This equipment

is very important for proper vehicle loading and

good handling when you’re driving.

Will you have to make any holes in the body of

your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch?

If you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when

you remove the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly

carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get

into your vehicle. See “Carbon Monoxide” in the

Index. Dirt and water can, too.

Safety Chains

You should always attach chains between your vehicle

and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue

of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting

the road if it becomes separated from the hitch.

Instructions about safety chains may be provided by

the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.

Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching

safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper.

Always leave just enough slack so you can turn with

your rig. Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

If your trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs. (450 kg)

loaded, then it needs its own brakes -- and they must

be adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions

for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust

and maintain them properly.

Your trailer’s brake system can tap into the vehicle’s

hydraulic brake system only if:

The trailer parts can withstand 3,000 psi

(20 650 kPa) of pressure.

The trailer’s brake system will use less than

0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’s

master cylinder. Otherwise, both braking systems

won’t work well. You could even lose your brakes.

4-53

If everything checks out this far, then make the brake

fluid tap at the port on the master cylinder that sends

fluid to the rear brakes. But don’t use copper tubing

for this. If you do, it will bend and finally break off.

Use steel brake tubing.

Driving with a Trailer

CAUTION:

If you have a rear-most window open and you

pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon monoxide

(CO) could come into your vehicle. You can’t

see or smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness

or death. See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.

To maximize your safety when towing a trailer:

Have your exhaust system inspected for

leaks, and make necessary repairs before

starting on your trip.

Keep the rear-most windows closed.

CAUTION: (Continued)

If exhaust does come into your vehicle

through a window in the rear or another

opening, drive with your front, main heating

or cooling system on and with the fan on

any speed. This will bring fresh, outside air

into your vehicle. Do not use MAX A/C or

RECIRCULATION because it only

recirculates the air inside your vehicle.

See “Comfort Controls” in the Index.

Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.

Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get

to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of

handling and braking with the added weight of the

trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you

are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as

responsive as your vehicle is by itself.

4-54

Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform

(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector,

lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has

electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving

and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to

be sure the brakes are working. This lets you check

your electrical connection at the same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the

load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes

are still working.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as

you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.

This can help you avoid situations that require heavy

braking and sudden turns.

Passing

You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when

you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good

deal longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the

passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.

Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that

hand to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move

your hand to the right. Always back up slowly and,

if possible, have someone guide you.

Making Turns

NOTICE:

Making very sharp turns while trailering

could cause the trailer to come in contact with

the vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged.

Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering.

When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider

turns than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t

strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other

objects. Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well

in advance.

4-55

Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer

When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to have

extra wiring and a heavy-duty turn signal flasher

(included in the optional trailering package).

The arrows on your instrument panel will flash

whenever you signal a turn or lane change. Properly

hooked up, the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other

drivers you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.

When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument

panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer

are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind you

are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s important

to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are

still working.

Driving On Grades

Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start

down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift

down, you might have to use your brakes so much

that they would get hot and no longer work well.

On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your

speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce the

possibility of engine and transmission overheating.

If you have an automatic transmission, you should

use THIRD (3) when towing a trailer. Operating your

vehicle in THIRD (3) when towing a trailer will

minimize heat buildup and extend the life of your

transmission. Or, if you have a manual transmission,

it’s better not to use FIFTH (5) gear, just drive in

FOURTH (4) gear (or, as you need to, a lower gear).

When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,

consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a

lower temperature than at normal altitudes. If you turn

your engine off immediately after towing at high altitude

on steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signs

similar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the

engine run while parked (preferably on level ground)

with the automatic transmission in PARK (P) (or the

manual transmission out of gear and the parking brake

applied) for a few minutes before turning the engine off.

If you do get the overheat warning, see “Engine

Overheating” in the Index.

4-56

Parking on Hills

CAUTION:

You really should not park your vehicle, with a

trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes

wrong, your rig could start to move. People can

be injured, and both your vehicle and the trailer

can be damaged.

But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill,

here’s how to do it:

1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into

PARK (P) yet, or into gear for a manual

transmission. Then turn your wheels into the curb

if facing downhill or into traffic if facing uphill.

2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the

regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your

parking brake, and then shift into PARK (P), or

REVERSE (R) for a manual transmission.

5. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle with an

automatic transfer case, be sure the transfer case is

in a drive gear -- not in NEUTRAL.

6. Release the regular brakes.

CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if

the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the

parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.

If you have left the engine running, the vehicle

can move suddenly. You or others could be

injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move,

even when you’re on fairly level ground,

use the steps that follow.

Always put the shift lever fully in PARK (P) with

the parking brake firmly set.

If the transfer case on four-wheel drive vehicles

is in NEUTRAL, your vehicle will be free to

roll, even if your shift lever is in PARK (P).

So, be sure the transfer case is in a drive

gear -- not in NEUTRAL. See “Four-Wheel

Drive (Automatic Transfer Case)” in the Index.

4-57

When You Are Ready to Leave After

Parking on a Hill

1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down

while you:

Start your engine;

Shift into a gear; and

Release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.

Maintenance When Trailer Towing

Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re

pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for

more on this. Things that are especially important

in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid

(don’t overfill), engine oil, axle lubricant, belt, cooling

system and brake system. Each of these is covered in

this manual, and the Index will help you find them

quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review

these sections before you start your trip.

Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and

bolts are tight.

4-58

Trailer Wiring Harness

The light-duty trailer wiring is a six-wire harness

assembly. The optional heavy-duty trailer wiring is an

eight-wire harness assembly. The harnesses are stored

under the vehicle, along the passenger-side frame

crossmember on two-door vehicles or on the driver’s

side corner frame rear crossmember on four-door

vehicles. The heavy-duty trailer wiring is fused in the

engine compartment fuse block. See “Fuses and Circuit

Breakers” in the Index. Both harnesses have no

connector and should be wired by a qualified

electrical technician. The technician can use the

following color code chart when connecting the

wiring harness to your trailer.

Dark Blue: Use for electric trailer brakes or auxiliary

wiring (eight-wire harness only).

Red: Use for battery charging; it connects to the

starter solenoid (eight-wire harness only).

Light Green: Back-up lamps.

Brown: Taillamps and parking lamps.

Yellow: Left stoplamp and turn signal.

Dark Green: Right stoplamp and turn signal.

White: Ground wire.

Light Blue: Auxiliary stoplamp.

Securely attach the harness to the trailer, then tape or

strap it to your vehicle’s frame rail. Be sure you leave it

loose enough so the wiring doesn’t bend or break,

but not so loose that it drags on the ground. Store the

harness in its original place. Wrap the harness together

and tie it neatly so it won’t be damaged.

5- 5-1

Section 5 Problems on the Road

Here you’ll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road.

5-2 Hazard Warning Flashers

5-3 Other Warning Devices

5-3 Jump Starting

5-8 Towing Your Vehicle

5-8 Engine Overheating

5-10 Cooling System

5-17 Engine Fan Noise

5-17 If a Tire Goes Flat

5-18 Changing a Flat Tire

5-30 Compact Spare Tire (If Equipped)

5-31 If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow

5-2

Hazard Warning Flashers

Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They

also let police know you have a problem. Your front and

rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.

Press the button located

on top of the steering

column all the way down

to make your front and

rear turn signal lamps

flash on and off.

Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what

position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in.

To turn off the flashers, press the button until the first

click and release.

When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn

signals won’t work.

5-3

Other Warning Devices

If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at

the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind

your vehicle.

Jump Starting

If your battery has run down, you want to use another

vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle.

But please use the following steps to do it safely.

CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can be

dangerous because:

They contain acid that can burn you.

They contain gas that can explode or ignite.

They contain enough electricity to burn you.

If you don’t follow these steps exactly, some or

all of these things can hurt you.

NOTICE:

Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage

to your vehicle that wouldn’t be covered by

your warranty.

The ACDelco battery in your vehicle has a

built-in hydrometer. Do not charge, test or

jump start the battery if the hydrometer looks

clear or light yellow. Replace the battery when

there is a clear or light yellow hydrometer and

a cranking complaint.

Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling

it won’t work, and it could damage your vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt

battery with a negative ground system.

NOTICE:

If the other system isn’t a 12-volt system with a

negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged.

5-4

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables

can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching

each other. If they are, it could cause a ground

connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able

to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could

damage the electrical systems.

To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,

set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles

involved in the procedure. Put an automatic

transmission in PARK (P) and put a manual

transmission in NEUTRAL. Be sure the transfer

case is not in NEUTRAL.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug

unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette

lighter, or accessory power outlets (if equipped).

Turn off all lamps that aren’t needed as well as

radios. This will avoid sparks and help to save both

batteries. In addition, it could save your radio!

NOTICE:

If you leave your radio on, it could be badly

damaged. The repair wouldn’t be covered by

your warranty.

4. Open both hoods and locate the batteries.

(Your vehicle’s battery is located towards the front

of the vehicle, on the passenger side of the engine

compartment. See “Engine Compartment Overview” in

the Index for more information on location.) Find the

positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on each battery.

CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can cause battery

gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,

and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if

you need more light.

Be sure the battery has enough water. You don’t

need to add water to the ACDelco battery

(or batteries) installed in every new GM vehicle.

But if a battery has filler caps, be sure the right

amount of fluid is there. If it is low, add water to

take care of that first. If you don’t, explosive gas

could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.

Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally get it in

your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with

water and get medical help immediately.

5-5

CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you

badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts

once the engine is running.

5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or

missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock.

The vehicles could be damaged too.

Before you connect the cables, here are some

basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go

to positive (+) and negative (-) will go to a heavy,

unpainted metal engine part. Don’t connect

positive (+) to negative (-) or you’ll get a short that

would damage the battery and maybe other parts too.

And don’t connect the negative (-) to negative (-).

6. Connect the red

positive (+) cable to

the positive (+) terminal

of the vehicle with the

dead battery.

7. Don’t let the other

end touch metal.

Connect it to the

positive (+) terminal

of the good battery.

5-6

8. Now connect the black

negative (-) cable to

the good battery’s

negative (-) terminal.

Don’t let the other end touch anything until the next

step. The other end of the negative (-) cable doesn’t

go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy, unpainted

metal part on the engine of the vehicle with the

dead battery.

9. Attach the cable at least

18 inches (45 cm) away

from the dead battery,

but not near engine parts

that move. The electrical

connection is just as

good there, but the

chance of sparks getting

back to the battery is

much less.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run

the engine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery. If it won’t

start after a few tries, make sure all connections are

good. If it still won’t start, it probably needs service.

5-7

12. Remove the cables in reverse order following the

diagram and directions below to prevent electrical

shorting. Take care that they don’t touch each

other or any other metal.

Jumper Cable Removal

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part

B. Good Battery

C. Dead Battery

To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles,

do the following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from the

heavy, unpainted metal engine part on the vehicle

with the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from the

negative (-) battery terminal on the vehicle with the

good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the

positive (+) battery terminal on the vehicle with the

good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the

positive battery terminal of the other vehicle.

5-8

Towing Your Vehicle

Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if

you need to have your vehicle towed. See “Roadside

Assistance” and “Recreational Vehicle Towing” in

the Index.

Engine Overheating

You will find a coolant temperature gage on your

vehicle’s instrument panel. See “Gages” in the Index.

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine can burn you

badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away

from the engine if you see or hear steam coming

from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away

from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until

there is no sign of steam or coolant before you

open the hood.

If you keep driving when your engine is

overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.

You or others could be badly burned. Stop your

engine if it overheats, and get out of the vehicle

until the engine is cool.

NOTICE:

If your engine catches fire because you keep

driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be

badly damaged. The costly repairs would not

be covered by your warranty.

5-9

If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear no

steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes

the engine can get a little too hot when you:

Climb a long hill on a hot day.

Stop after high-speed driving.

Idle for long periods in traffic.

Tow a trailer. See “Driving on Grades” in the Index.

If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,

try this for a minute or so:

1. If your air conditioner is on, turn it off.

2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan

speed and open the window as necessary.

3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);

otherwise, shift to the highest gear while

driving -- DRIVE (D) or THIRD (3) for

automatic transmissions.

If you no longer have the overheat warning, you

can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about

10 minutes. If the warning doesn’t come back on,

you can drive normally.

If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park

your vehicle right away.

If there’s still no sign of steam, push down the

accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as fast

as normal idle speed for at least three minutes while

you’re parked. If you still have the warning, turn off

the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it

cools down.

You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service

help right away.

5-10

Cooling System

When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what

you’ll see:

A. Coolant Recovery Tank

B. Radiator Pressure Cap

C. Engine Cooling Fan

If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,

don’t do anything else until it cools down.

When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at

least up to the ADD mark. If it isn’t, you may have

a leak in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator,

water pump or somewhere else in the cooling system.

5-11

CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine

parts, can be very hot. Don’t touch them.

If you do, you can be burned.

Don’t run the engine if there is a leak. If you run

the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could

cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.

Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.

NOTICE:

Engine damage from running your engine

without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty.

NOTICE:

When adding coolant, it is important that you

use only DEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolant.

If coolant other than DEX-COOL is added to

the system, premature engine, heater core or

radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the

engine coolant will require change sooner -- at

30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,

whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the

use of coolant other than DEX-COOL is not

covered by your new vehicle warranty.

If there seems to be no leak, start the engine again.

See if the engine cooling fan speed increases when

idle speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal

down. If it doesn’t, your vehicle needs service.

Turn off the engine.

5-12

How to Add Coolant to the Coolant

Recovery Tank

If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level

isn’t at the ADD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean,

drinkable water and DEX-COOL engine coolant at

the coolant recovery tank. See “Engine Coolant” in the

Index for more information.

CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your cooling system

can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other

liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper

coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant

warning system is set for the proper coolant

mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture,

your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t

get the overheat warning. Your engine could

catch fire and you or others could be burned.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water

and DEX-COOL coolant.

NOTICE:

In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the

engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.

Use the recommended coolant and the proper

coolant mixture.

5-13

CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot

engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol

and it will burn if the engine parts are hot

enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.

When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the

ADD mark, start your vehicle.

If the overheat warning continues, there’s one more

thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant

mixture directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling

system is cool before you do it.

CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling

system can blow out and burn you badly. They

are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator

CAUTION: (Continued)

pressure cap -- even a little -- they can come

out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the

cooling system, including the radiator pressure

cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and

radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have

to turn the pressure cap.

5-14

How to Add Coolant to the Radiator

1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when the

cooling system, including the radiator pressure cap

and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the

pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until it first

stops. (Don’t press down while turning the

pressure cap.)

If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop.

A hiss means there is still some pressure left.

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now push

down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap.

5-15

3. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL

coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler neck.

See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for more

information about the proper coolant mixture.

4. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to ADD mark.

5. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank,

but leave the radiator pressure cap off.

5-16

6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the

upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the

engine cooling fan.

7. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator

filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add

more of the proper DEX-COOL coolant mixture

through the filler neck until the level reaches the

base of the filler neck.

8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during

this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the

filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure the

arrows on the pressure cap line up like this.

5-17

Engine Fan Noise

This vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan. When

the clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to provide

more air to cool the engine. In most everyday driving

conditions, the clutch is not engaged. This improves

fuel economy and reduces fan noise. Under heavy

vehicle loading, trailer towing and/or high outside

temperatures, the fan speed increases when the clutch

engages. So you may hear an increase in fan noise.

This is normal and should not be mistaken as the

transmission slipping or making extra shifts. It is merely

the cooling system functioning properly. The fan will

slow down when additional cooling is not required and

the clutch disengages.

You may also hear this fan noise when you start the

engine. It will go away as the fan clutch disengages.

If a Tire Goes Flat

It’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving,

especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes

out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.

But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a

few tips about what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that

pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off

the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.

Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake

to a stop well out of the traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like

a skid and may require the same correction you’d use

in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from

the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by

steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be

very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently

brake to a stop -- well off the road if possible.

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your

jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.

5-18

Changing a Flat Tire

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage

by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard

warning flashers.

CAUTION:

Changing a tire can cause an injury. The vehicle

can slip off the jack and roll over you or other

people. You and they could be badly injured.

Find a level place to change your tire. To help

prevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatic transmission shift lever in

PARK (P) or shift a manual transmission

to FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).

3. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle,

be sure the transfer case is in a drive

gear -- not in NEUTRAL.

CAUTION: (Continued)

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Put the wheel blocks at the front and rear

of the tire farthest away from the one being

changed. That would be the tire on the other

side of the vehicle, at the opposite end.

The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and

change a tire.

5-19

Removing the Spare Tire and Tools

The jacking equipment you’ll need is stored along the

driver’s side inner rear quarter panel. In some cases, you

may have to remove the spare tire in order to reach the

jack. Your vehicle is also equipped with work gloves

and a plastic ground mat to assist in the changing of

a flat tire.

1. To remove your jack

cover, pull up on the

latch(es) on the cover.

Remove the wheel

blocks, jack and

wheel wrench.

The following instructions explain how to remove the

spare tire, depending on where it is mounted on your

vehicle. See “Compact SpareTire” later in this section

for more information about the compact spare.

NOTICE:

Never remove or restow a tire from/to a stowage

position under the vehicle while the vehicle is

supported by a jack. Always tighten the tire fully

against the underside of the vehicle when restowing.

2. To remove the

underbody-mounted

spare, insert the

chisel end of the wheel

wrench, on an angle,

into the hoist shaft hole

in the rear bumper.

Be sure the chisel end

of the wheel wrench

connects into the

hoist shaft.

5-20

Some vehicles may be equipped with a hoist shaft hole

cover on the passenger side of the rear bumper. You

must remove this to gain access to the hoist shaft hole.

Insert your index finger into the indentation near the

lamp and pull to remove the cover.

3. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the

spare tire. Keep turning the wheel wrench until the spare

tire can be pulled out from under the vehicle.

When the tire has been completely lowered, tilt the

retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the

wheel opening. Pull the tire out from under the vehicle.

NOTICE:

To help avoid vehicle damage, do not drive the

vehicle before the cable is properly stored.

If you have an inside-mounted spare tire, the tire must

be removed in order to have access to the jack storage.

To remove an inside-mounted spare tire, reach into your

tire’s cover and unscrew the wing nut at the center of the

wheel. Remove it and the retainer. Unhook the tire from

the mounting bracket and remove the cover.

To remove a rear-mounted spare tire, first make sure

that the carrier arm is fully-latched to the endgate.

Then remove the spare tire cover.

5-21

4. The locking wheel nut

can be removed by

snapping the rubber

weather cover off the

face of the lock case.

5. Insert the key and pull

the lock case straight

off. It is not necessary to

turn the key.

6. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.

The tools you’ll be using include the jack (A) and wheel

wrench (B). Your vehicle may also have an optional hub

cap removal tool.

5-22

Position the chisel end of your wheel wrench, or the hub

cap removal tool (if equipped), in the notch of the hub

cap and pry off the hub cap.

Some of the molded plastic hub caps have imitation

wheel nuts molded into them. The wheel wrench won’t

fit these imitation nuts, so don’t try to remove them

with the socket end of the wheel wrench.

If you have individual wheel nut caps that cover each

nut, they must be removed in order to get to the wheel

nuts. Use the socket end of the wheel wrench to remove

the wheel nut caps.

Your wheel nut caps may attach your hub cap to

the wheel. Remove these wheel nut caps before you

take off the hub cap.

5-23

Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the

Spare Tire

1. Using the wheel wrench, loosen all the wheel nuts.

Don’t remove them yet.

2. Turn the jack handle clockwise to raise the jack lift head.

3. Fit the jack into the appropriate hole nearest the flat tire.

A. Front Frame Hole

B. Rear Frame Hole (2-Door) or Spring Hanger

Hole (4-Door)

5-24

CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is

dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you

could be badly injured or killed. Never get under

a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.

CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly

positioned can damage the vehicle and even

make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal

injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack

lift head into the proper location before raising

the vehicle.

4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle clockwise.

Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is

enough room for the spare tire to fit.

5. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.

5-25

6. Remove any rust or dirt

from the wheel bolts,

mounting surfaces and

spare wheel.

CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to

which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts

become loose after a time. The wheel could come

off and cause an accident. When you change a

wheel, remove any rust or dirt from the places

where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an

emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel

to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire

brush later, if you need to, to get all the rust or

dirt off.

CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If you

do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel could

fall off, causing a serious accident.

7. Place the spare on the wheel mounting surface.

8. Put the nuts on by hand.

Make sure the rounded

end is toward the wheel.

Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held against

the hub. If a nut can’t be turned by hand, use the wheel

wrench and see your dealer as soon as possible.

5-26

9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle

counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.

10. Use the wrench to

tighten the wheel nuts

firmly in a crisscross

sequence as shown.

CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened

wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose

and even come off. This could lead to an accident.

Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts. If you have

to replace them, be sure to get new GM original

equipment wheel nuts.

Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have

the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to

100 lb-ft (140 N·m).

NOTICE:

Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to

brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid

expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel

nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper

torque specification.

5-27

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools

CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in

the passenger compartment of the vehicle could

cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose

equipment could strike someone. Store all these

in the proper place.

NOTICE:

An aluminum wheel with a flat tire should

always be stored under the vehicle with the hoist.

However, storing it that way for an extended

period could damage the wheel. To avoid this,

have the wheel repaired as soon as possible.

Follow this diagram to store the underbody-mounted spare.

A. Retainer

B. Valve Stem

(Pointed Down)

C. Spare or Flat Tire

D. Spring

E. Wheel Wrench

F. Lower

G. Raise

H. Hoist Arm

1. Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle,

with the valve stem pointed down and to the rear.

2. Pull the retainer through the wheel.

3. Put the chisel end of the wheel wrench, on an angle,

through the hole in the rear bumper and into the

hoist shaft.

4. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the

vehicle. Continue turning the wheel wrench until the

tire is secure and the cable is tight. The spare tire

hoist cannot be overtightened.

5-28

5. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull, and

then try to rotate or turn the tire. If the tire moves,

use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable.

Follow this diagram for the inside-mounted spare.

A. Spare or Flat Tire

B. Retainer

C. Nut

D. Wheel Carrier

E. Hook

5-29

Follow this diagram for the rear-mounted spare.

A. Wheel Carrier

B. Spare or Flat Tire

C. Wheel Nut and Locking Nut Cylinder

Reinstall the locking wheel nut using the wheel wrench.

Then push the lock case onto the lug nut until it stops.

The key does not have to be inserted into the lock. Push

the lock case to be sure it is secured. The special lug nut

and lock case is not intended to be used on any road

wheel, only on the spare wheel carrier. Tighten the nuts

on the wheel carrier to 22 to 32 lb-ft (30 to 40 N·m).

CAUTION:

Make sure the tire and carrier are secure.

Driving with the tire or carrier unlatched

could injure pedestrians or damage the vehicle.

5-30

Return the jack, wheel wrench and wheel blocks to the

proper location in your vehicle’s rear area. Secure the

items and replace the jack cover.

A. Retainer

B. Rubber Band

(Some Models)

C. Work Gloves

D. Mat

E. Jack Storage Cover

F. Wheel Blocks

G. Hub Cap

Removal Tool

(Some Models)

H. Wheel Wrench

I. Jack

J. Jacking Instructions

Compact Spare Tire (If Equipped)

Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated

when your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.

Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should

be 60 psi (420 kPa).

After installing the compact spare on your vehicle,

you should stop as soon as possible and make sure

your spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare

is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph

(105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km),

so you can finish your trip and have your full-size tire

repaired or replaced where you want. Of course, it’s best

to replace your spare with a full-size tire as soon as you

can. Your spare will last longer and be in good shape in

case you need it again.

NOTICE:

When the compact spare is installed, don’t take

your vehicle through an automatic car wash with

guide rails. The compact spare can get caught on

the rails. That can damage the tire and wheel,

and maybe other parts of your vehicle.

5-31

Don’t use your compact spare on other vehicles.

And don’t mix your compact spare tire or wheel with

other wheels or tires. They won’t fit. Keep your spare

tire and its wheel together.

NOTICE:

Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare. Using

them can damage your vehicle and can damage

the chains too. Don’t use tire chains on your

compact spare.

If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud,

Ice or Snow

In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will

need to spin the wheels, but you don’t want to spin

your wheels too fast. The method known as “rocking”

can help you get out when you’re stuck, but you must

use caution.

CAUTION:

If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can

explode, and you or others could be injured.

And, the transmission or other parts of the

vehicle can overheat. That could cause an engine

compartment fire or other damage. When you’re

stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible. Don’t

spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown

on the speedometer.

NOTICE:

Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your

vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the wheels

too fast while shifting your transmission back

and forth, you can destroy your transmission.

For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,

see “Tire Chains” in the Index.

5-32

Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out

First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will

clear the area around your front wheels. If you have a

four-wheel drive vehicle, shift into 4HI. Then shift back

and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear

(or with a manual transmission, between FIRST (1) or

SECOND (2) and REVERSE (R)), spinning the wheels

as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal while

you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal

when the transmission is in gear. By slowly spinning

your wheels in the forward and reverse directions, you

will cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle.

If that doesn’t get you out after a few tries, you may

need to be towed out. Or, you can use your recovery

hooks if your vehicle has them. If you do need to be

towed out, see “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.

Using the Recovery Hooks

Your vehicle may be equipped with recovery hooks.

The recovery hooks are provided at the front of your

vehicle. You may need to use them if you’re stuck

off-road and need to be pulled to some place where

you can continue driving.

5-33

CAUTION:

The recovery hooks, when used, are under a lot

of force. Always pull the vehicle straight out.

Never pull on the hooks at a sideways angle. The

hooks could break off and you or others could be

injured from the chain or cable snapping back.

NOTICE:

Never use the recovery hooks to tow the vehicle.

Your vehicle could be damaged and it would not

be covered by warranty.

6- 6-1

Section 6 Service and Appearance Care

Here you will find information about the care of your vehicle. This section begins with service and fuel information,

and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels. There is also technical information about your

vehicle, and a part devoted to its appearance care.

6-2 Service

6-3 Fuel

6-5 Fuels in Foreign Countries

6-6 Filling Your Tank

6-8 Filling a Portable Fuel Container

6-8 Checking Things Under the Hood

6-11 Engine Oil

6-16 Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

6-17 Automatic Transmission Fluid

6-20 Manual Transmission Fluid

6-21 Hydraulic Clutch

6-22 Rear Axle

6-22 Four-Wheel Drive

6-24 Engine Coolant

6-27 Radiator Pressure Cap

6-28 Power Steering Fluid

6-28 Windshield Washer Fluid

6-30 Brakes

6-34 Battery

6-35 Bulb Replacement

6-42 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement

6-44 Tires

6-53 Appearance Care

6-53 Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle

6-56 Care of Safety Belts

6-57 Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle

6-61 GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials

6-62 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

6-62 Service Parts Identification Label

6-63 Electrical System

6-72 Replacement Bulbs

6-72 Capacities and Specifications

6-73 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts

6-2

Service

Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to

be happy with it. We hope you’ll go to your dealer for

all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM parts and

GM-trained and supported service people.

We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.

Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

Doing Your Own Service Work

If you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll

want to use the proper service manual. It tells you much

more about how to service your vehicle than this manual

can. To order the proper service manual, see “Service

and Owner Publications” in the Index.

Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting

to do your own service work, see “Servicing Your Air

Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.

You should keep a record with all parts receipts and

list the mileage and the date of any service work you

perform. See “Maintenance Record” in the Index.

6-3

CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle could be

damaged if you try to do service work on a

vehicle without knowing enough about it.

Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,

experience, the proper replacement parts

and tools before you attempt any vehicle

maintenance task.

Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and

other fasteners. “English” and “metric”

fasteners can be easily confused. If you use

the wrong fasteners, parts can later break

or fall off. You could be hurt.

Adding Equipment to the Outside of

Your Vehicle

Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can

affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind noise

and affect windshield washer performance. Check with

your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of

your vehicle.

Fuel

Use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or

higher. It is recommended that the gasoline meet

specifications which were developed by the American

Automobile Manufacturers Association (AAMA) and

endorsed by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Manufacturers

Association for better vehicle performance and engine

protection. Gasolines meeting the AAMA specification

could provide improved driveability and emission control

system performance compared to other gasolines.

In Canada, look for the

“Auto Makers’ Choice”

label on the fuel pump.

Canada Only

6-4

Be sure the posted octane is at least 87. If the octane is

less than 87, you may get a heavy knocking noise when

you drive. If it’s bad enough, it can damage your engine.

If you’re using fuel rated at 87 octane or higher and

you hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service.

But don’t worry if you hear a little pinging noise when

you’re accelerating or driving up a hill. That’s normal,

and you don’t have to buy a higher octane fuel to get

rid of pinging. It’s the heavy, constant knock that means

you have a problem.

If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission

Standards (indicated on the underhood emission control

label), it is designed to operate on fuels that meet

California specifications. If such fuels are not available

in states adopting California emissions standards, your

vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting

federal specifications, but emission control system

performance may be affected.

The malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument

panel may turn on and/or your vehicle may fail a

smog-check test. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp”

in the Index. If this occurs, return to your authorized

GM dealer for diagnosis to determine the cause of

failure. In the event it is determined that the cause of

the condition is the type of fuels used, repairs may not

be covered by your warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low

emissions may contain an octane-enhancing

additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese

tricarbonyl (MMT); ask your service station operator

whether or not the fuel contains MMT. General Motors

does not recommend the use of such gasolines.

If fuels containing MMT are used, spark plug life

may be reduced and your emission control system

performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator

lamp on your instrument panel may turn on. If this

occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for service.

6-5

To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States

are now required to contain additives that will help

prevent deposits from forming in your engine and fuel

system, allowing your emission control system to

function properly. Therefore, you should not have

to add anything to the fuel. In addition, gasolines

containing oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol,

and reformulated gasolines may be available in

your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors

recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly

if they comply with the specifications described earlier.

NOTICE:

Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that

contains methanol. Don’t use it. It can corrode

metal parts in your fuel system and also damage

plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t

be covered under your warranty.

Fuels in Foreign Countries

If you plan on driving in another country outside the

United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard

to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not

recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs

caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be covered by

your warranty.

To check on fuel availability, ask an auto club, or

contact a major oil company that does business in the

country where you’ll be driving.

6-6

Filling Your Tank

CAUTION:

Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. It burns

violently, and that can cause very bad injuries.

Don’t smoke if you’re near gasoline or refueling

your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking

materials away from gasoline.

The fuel cap is behind a hinged door on driver’s side of

your vehicle.

While refueling, hang the cap by the tether from the

hook on the filler door.

To remove the cap, turn it slowly to the

left (counterclockwise). The cap has a spring in it; if

you let go of the cap too soon, it will spring back to

the right.

6-7

CAUTION:

If you get gasoline on yourself and then

something ignites it, you could be badly burned.

Gasoline can spray out on you if you open the

fuel filler cap too quickly. This spray can happen

if your tank is nearly full, and is more likely in

hot weather. Open the fuel filler cap slowly and

wait for any “hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew

the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from

painted surfaces as soon as possible. See “Cleaning the

Outside of Your Vehicle” in the Index.

When you put the cap back on, turn it to the

right (clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make

sure you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can

determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly

installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the

atmosphere. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in

the Index.

NOTICE:

If you need a new cap, be sure to get the right

type. Your dealer can get one for you. If you get

the wrong type, it may not fit properly. This may

cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light

and your fuel tank and emissions system may be

damaged. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in

the Index.

6-8

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in

your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the

container can ignite the gasoline vapor. You can

be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this

occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:

Dispense gasoline only into

approved containers.

Do not fill a container while it is inside a

vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or

on any surface other than the ground.

Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the

inside of the fill opening before operating

the nozzle. Contact should be maintained

until the filling is complete.

Don’t smoke while pumping gasoline.

Checking Things Under the Hood

CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and

start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil,

coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other

fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could

be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things

that will burn onto a hot engine.

6-9

Hood Release

To open the hood, first pull

the handle located inside

the vehicle on the lower

driver’s side of the

instrument panel.

Then go to the front of the vehicle and release the

secondary hood release. Lift the hood, release the hood prop from its retainer and

put the hood prop into the slot in the hood. Your vehicle

may have a lamp that comes on when you lift the hood.

6-10

Engine Compartment Overview

When you lift the hood, you’ll see these items:

A. Battery

B. Coolant Recovery Tank

C. Engine Oil Dipstick

D. Engine Oil Fill

E. Automatic

Transmission Dipstick

F. Power Steering Reservoir

G. Brake Master Cylinder

H. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

I. Fuse Block

J. Windshield Washer

Fluid Reservoir

6-11

Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are on

properly. Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on the

hood prop.

Remove the hood prop from the slot in the hood and

return the prop to its retainer.

Then just pull the hood down firmly to close. It will

latch when dropped from 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm)

without pressing on the hood.

Engine Oil

Checking Engine Oil

It’s a good idea to check your engine oil every time you

get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must

be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.

The oil dipstick handle is

a yellow ring located

toward the passenger side

of the engine compartment.

See “Engine Compartment

Overview” in the Index

for more information

on location.

Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to

drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil dipstick

might not show the actual level.

Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or

cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,

keeping the tip down, and check the level.

6-12

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is at or below the ADD line, then you’ll need

to add at least one quart of oil. But you must use the

right kind. This part explains what kind of oil to use. For

crankcase capacity, see “Capacities and Specifications”

in the Index.

NOTICE:

Don’t add too much oil. If your engine has

so much oil that the oil level gets above the

cross-hatched area that shows the proper

operating range, your engine could be damaged.

The engine oil fill cap is located toward the passenger

side of the engine compartment. See “Engine

Compartment Overview” in the Index for more

information on the location of the engine oil fill cap.

Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in

the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way

back in when you’re through.

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use

Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by

looking for the starburst symbol.

This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by

the American Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use any

oil which does not carry this starburst symbol.

If you change your own oil,

be sure you use oil that has

the starburst symbol on the

front of the oil container. If

you have your oil changed

for you, be sure the oil put

into your engine is

American Petroleum

Institute certified for

gasoline engines.

You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your

vehicle, as shown in the following chart:

6-13

As in the chart shown previously, SAE 5W-30 is best for

your vehicle. However, you can use SAE 10W-30 if it’s

going to be 0 F (-18 C) or above. These numbers on

an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not

use other viscosity oils, such as SAE 20W-50.

NOTICE:

Use only engine oil with the American

Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline

Engines starburst symbol. Failure to use the

recommended oil can result in engine damage

not covered by your warranty.

GM Goodwrench oil meets all the requirements for

your vehicle.

If you are in an area where the temperature falls below

-20 F (-29 C), consider using either an SAE 5W-30

synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide

easier cold starting and better protection for your engine

at extremely low temperatures.

6-14

Engine Oil Additives

Don’t add anything to your oil. The recommended oils

with the starburst symbol are all you will need for good

performance and engine protection.

When to Change Engine Oil

If any one of these is true for you, use the short trip/city

maintenance schedule:

Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km).

This is particularly important when outside

temperatures are below freezing.

Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent

driving in stop-and-go traffic).

You operate your vehicle in dusty areas or

off-road frequently.

You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top

of your vehicle.

The vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi

or other commercial application.

Driving under these conditions causes engine oil to

break down sooner. If any one of these is true for your

vehicle, then you need to change your oil and filter

every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months -- whichever

occurs first.

If none of them is true, use the long trip/highway

maintenance schedule. Change the oil and filter every

7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months -- whichever

occurs first. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed

engine under highway conditions causes engine oil to

break down slower.

6-15

Remote Oil Filter (Four-Wheel Drive)

The access door for the

remote oil filter is in the

steering linkage shield

assembly located under the

radiator support. Turn the

screw to unlock or lock the

door. If you open the door,

make sure it is securely

closed when you

are finished.

What to Do with Used Oil

Did you know that used engine oil contains certain

elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could

even cause cancer? Don’t let used oil stay on your skin

for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and

water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly throw

away clothing or rags containing used engine oil.

See the manufacturer’s warnings about the use and

disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a real threat to the environment. If you

change your own oil, be sure to drain all free-flowing

oil from the filter before disposal. Don’t ever dispose of

oil by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground,

into sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,

recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil.

If you have a problem properly disposing of your used

oil, ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling

center for help.

6-16

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

The engine air cleaner/filter is located toward the front of

the engine compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the Index for

more information on engine air cleaner/filter location.

To remove the engine air cleaner/filter, do the following:

1. Remove the fasteners that hold the cover on.

2. Remove the cover and lift out the engine

air cleaner/filter.

3. Insert a new engine air cleaner/filter.

4. Reinstall the engine air cleaner/filter cover.

5. Tighten the fasteners to hold the cover in place.

CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter

off can cause you or others to be burned. The air

cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops flame if

the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and the

engine backfires, you could be burned. Don’t

drive with it off, and be careful working on the

engine with the air cleaner/filter off.

NOTICE:

If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can

cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily

get into your engine, which will damage it.

Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when

you’re driving.

6-17

Automatic Transmission Fluid

When to Check and Change

A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid

level is when the engine oil is changed.

Change both the fluid and filter every 15,000 miles

(25 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or

more of these conditions:

In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature

regularly reaches 90 F (32 C) or higher.

In hilly or mountainous terrain.

When doing frequent trailer towing.

Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of

these conditions, change the fluid and filter every

50,000 miles (83 000 km).

See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.

How to Check

Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may

choose to have this done at the dealership service department.

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions

here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.

NOTICE:

Too much or too little fluid can damage your

transmission. Too much can mean that some of

the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine

parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.

Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check

your transmission fluid.

Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the

transmission fluid level if you have been driving:

When outside temperatures are above 90 F (32 C).

At high speed for quite a while.

In heavy traffic -- especially in hot weather.

While pulling a trailer.

6-18

To get the right reading, the fluid should be at

normal operating temperature, which is 180 F to 200 F

(82 C to 93 C).

Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about

15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures are above

50 F (10 C). If it’s colder than 50 F (10 C), drive

the vehicle in THIRD (3) until the engine temperature

gage moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes.

A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has

been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off,

but this is used only as a reference. Let the engine run

at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are

50 F (10 C) or more. If it’s colder than 50 F (10 C),

you may have to idle the engine longer. Should the fluid

level be low during this cold check, you must check the

fluid hot before adding fluid. Checking the fluid hot will

give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level.

Checking the Fluid Level

Prepare your vehicle as follows:

Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the

engine running.

With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever

in PARK (P).

With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift

lever through each gear range, pausing for about

three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift

lever in PARK (P).

Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.

Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:

1. Locate the handle

for the automatic

transmission dipstick

near the rear of the

engine compartment.

See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the Index

for more information on location.

Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick and

wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.

6-19

2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and

then pull it back out again.

3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower

level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area,

below the cross-hatched area, for a cold check or in

the HOT area or cross-hatched area for a hot check.

4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the

dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle

down to lock the dipstick in place.

How to Add Fluid

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what

kind of transmission fluid to use. See “Recommended

Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.

Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid

while it is hot. (A cold check is used only as a

reference.) If the fluid level is low, add only enough of

the proper fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for

a hot check. It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less

than one pint (0.5 L). Don’t overfill.

NOTICE:

We recommend you use only fluid labeled

DEXRON -III, because fluid with that label is

made especially for your automatic transmission.

Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON -III

is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.

After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as

described under “How to Check.”

When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the

dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle

down to lock the dipstick in place.

6-20

Manual Transmission Fluid

When to Check

A good time to have it checked is when the engine

oil is changed. However, the fluid in your manual

transmission doesn’t require changing.

How to Check

Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may

choose to have this done at your GM dealership

service department.

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the

instructions here, or you could get a false reading.

NOTICE:

Too much or too little fluid can damage your

transmission. Too much can mean that some of

the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine

parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.

Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check

your transmission fluid.

Check the fluid level only when your engine is off, the

vehicle is parked on a level place and the transmission is cool

enough for you to rest your fingers on the transmission case.

Then, follow these steps:

1. Remove the filler plug.

2. Check that the lubricant level is up to the bottom of

the filler plug hole.

3. If the fluid level is good, install the plug and be sure

it is fully seated. If the fluid level is low, add more

fluid as described in the next steps.

6-21

How to Add Fluid

Here’s how to add fluid. Refer to the Maintenance

Schedule to determine what kind of fluid to use. See

“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.

1. Remove the filler plug.

2. Add fluid at the filler plug hole. Add only enough

fluid to bring the fluid level up to the bottom of the

filler plug hole.

3. Install the filler plug. Be sure the plug is fully seated.

Hydraulic Clutch

The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle is

self-adjusting. The clutch master cylinder reservoir is

filled with hydraulic clutch fluid.

It is not necessary to regularly check clutch fluid unless

you suspect there is a leak in the system. Adding fluid

won’t correct a leak.

A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.

Have the system inspected and repaired.

When to Check and What to Use

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how

often you should check the fluid level in your clutch

master cylinder reservoir and for the proper fluid. See

“Owner Checks and Services” and “Recommended

Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.

How to Check and Add Fluid

The proper fluid should be added if the level does not

reach the bottom of the diaphragm when it’s in place in

the reservoir. See the instructions on the reservoir cap.

6-22

Rear Axle

When to Check and Change Lubricant

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how

often to check the lubricant and when to change it.

See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.

How to Check Lubricant

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,

you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant

to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.

What to Use

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what

kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and

Lubricants” in the Index.

Four-Wheel Drive

Most lubricant checks in this section also apply to

four-wheel-drive vehicles. However, they have

two additional systems that need lubrication.

Transfer Case

When to Check Lubricant

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how

often to check the lubricant. See “Periodic Maintenance

Inspections” in the Index.

6-23

How to Check Lubricant

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,

you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant

to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.

Use care not to overtighten plug.

What to Use

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what

kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and

Lubricants” in the Index.

Front Axle

When to Check and Change Lubricant

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how

often to check the lubricant and when to change it.

See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.

How to Check Lubricant

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,

you may need to add some lubricant.

6-24

When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant to raise

the level to 1/2 inch (12 mm) below the filler plug hole.

When the differential is at operating temperature

(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level to the

bottom of the filler plug hole.

What to Use

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what

kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and

Lubricants” in the Index.

Engine Coolant

The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with

DEX-COOL engine coolant. This coolant is designed

to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles

(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only

DEX-COOL extended life coolant.

The following explains your cooling system and how to

add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with

engine overheating, see “Engine Overheating” in

the Index.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and

DEX-COOL coolant will:

Give freezing protection down to -34 F (-37 C).

Give boiling protection up to 265 F (129 C).

Protect against rust and corrosion.

Help keep the proper engine temperature.

Let the warning lights and gages work as they should.

NOTICE:

When adding coolant, it is important that you

use only DEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolant.

If coolant other than DEX-COOL is added to

the system, premature engine, heater core or

radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the

engine coolant will require change sooner -- at

30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,

whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the

use of coolant other than DEX-COOL is not

covered by your new vehicle warranty.

6-25

What to Use

Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and

one-half DEX-COOL coolant which won’t damage

aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture,

you don’t need to add anything else.

CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your cooling system

can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other

liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper

coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant

warning system is set for the proper coolant

mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture,

your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t

get the overheat warning. Your engine could

catch fire and you or others could be burned.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water

and DEX-COOL coolant.

NOTICE:

If you use an improper coolant mixture, your

engine could overheat and be badly damaged.

The repair cost wouldn’t be covered by your

warranty. Too much water in the mixture can

freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core

and other parts.

If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,

have your dealer check your cooling system.

NOTICE:

If you use the proper coolant, you don’t have to

add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to

improve the system. These can be harmful.

6-26

Checking Coolant

The coolant recovery tank is located near the passenger

side of the engine compartment toward the front of the

vehicle. See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the

Index for more information on location.

The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your

engine is cold, the coolant level should be at ADD, or a

little higher. When your engine is warm, the level should

be up to FULL HOT, or a little higher.

Adding Coolant

If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL

coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank.

CAUTION:

Turning the radiator pressure cap when the

engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and

scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly.

With the coolant recovery tank, you will almost

never have to add coolant at the radiator.

Never turn the radiator pressure cap -- even a

little -- when the engine and radiator are hot.

6-27

Add coolant mixture at the recovery tank, but be careful

not to spill it.

CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot

engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,

and it will burn if the engine parts are hot

enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.

Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator.

For information on how to add coolant to the radiator,

see “Cooling System” in the Index.

Radiator Pressure Cap

NOTICE:

Your radiator cap is a 15 psi (105 kPa)

pressure-type cap and must be tightly installed to

prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage

from overheating. Be sure the arrows on the cap

line up with the overflow tube on the radiator

filler neck.

6-28

Power Steering Fluid

When to Check Power Steering Fluid

It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid

unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you hear

an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system could indicate

a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired.

The power steering reservoir is located near the center of

the engine compartment. See “Engine Compartment

Overview” in the Index for more information on location.

How to Check Power Steering Fluid

Turn the key off, let the engine compartment cool down,

wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean, then

unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag.

Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Then remove

the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick.

The level should be between the ADD and FULL marks.

If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up

to the proper range.

What to Use

To determine what kind of fluid to use, see

“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.

Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper

fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to Use

When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read

the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be

operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature

may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient

protection against freezing.

6-29

Adding Washer Fluid

The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located toward

the front of the engine compartment on the driver’s side

of the vehicle. See “Engine Compartment Overview” in

the Index for more information on location.

Open the cap labeled WASHER FLUID ONLY with

the washer symbol on it. Add washer fluid until the

tank is full.

NOTICE:

When using concentrated washer fluid,

follow the manufacturer’s instructions for

adding water.

Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer

fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze

and damage your washer fluid tank and

other parts of the washer system. Also,

water doesn’t clean as well as washer fluid.

Fill your washer fluid tank only

three-quarters full when it’s very cold.

This allows for expansion if freezing occurs,

which could damage the tank if it is

completely full.

Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze) in

your windshield washer. It can damage

your washer system and paint.

6-30

Brakes

Brake Fluid

Your brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with

DOT-3 brake fluid. See “Engine Compartment

Overview” in the Index for the location of the reservoir.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the

reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake fluid

goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake

lining wear.

When new linings are put in, the fluid level goes back up.

The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of the brake

system. If it is, you should have your brake system fixed,

since a leak means that sooner or later your brakes won’t

work well, or won’t work at all.

So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off” your brake fluid.

Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid

when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much

fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add

(or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is

done on the brake hydraulic system.

CAUTION:

If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on

the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is hot

enough. You or others could be burned, and your

vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid only

when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.

See “Checking Brake Fluid” in this section.

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to

check your brake fluid. See “Periodic Maintenance

Inspections” in the Index.

6-31

Checking Brake Fluid

You can check the

brake fluid without

taking off the cap.

Just look at the brake fluid reservoir. The fluid level

should be above MIN. If it isn’t, have your brake system

checked to see if there is a leak.

After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,

make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the

MAX mark.

What to Add

When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake

fluid. Refer to “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”

in the Index. Use new brake fluid from a sealed

container only.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area

around the cap before removing it. This will help keep

dirt from entering the reservoir.

CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake

system, your brakes may not work well, or they

may not even work at all. This could cause a

crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.

6-32

NOTICE:

Using the wrong fluid can badly damage

brake system parts. For example, just a few

drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine

oil, in your brake system can damage brake

system parts so badly that they’ll have to be

replaced. Don’t let someone put in the

wrong kind of fluid.

If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s

painted surfaces, the paint finish can be

damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid

on your vehicle. If you do, wash it off

immediately. See “Appearance Care” in

the Index.

Brake Wear

Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a

high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn

and new pads are needed. The sound may come and go or

be heard all the time your vehicle is moving (except when

you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly).

CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means that soon

your brakes won’t work well. That could lead to

an accident. When you hear the brake wear

warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.

NOTICE:

Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads

could result in costly brake repair.

6-33

Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake

squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly

applied. This does not mean something is wrong with

your brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help

prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect

brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the

proper sequence to GM torque specifications.

Brake linings should always be replaced as complete

axle sets.

See “Brake System Inspection” in Section 7 of this manual

under Part C “Periodic Maintenance Inspections.”

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to

normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal

travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.

Brake Adjustment

Every time you make a brake stop, your disc brakes

adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle is complex.

Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well

together if the vehicle is to have really good braking.

Your vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality

GM brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking

system -- for example, when your brake linings wear

down and you have to have new ones put in -- be sure

you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you

don’t, your brakes may no longer work properly.

For example, if someone puts in brake linings that

are wrong for your vehicle, the balance between your

front and rear brakes can change -- for the worse.

The braking performance you’ve come to expect can

change in many other ways if someone puts in the

wrong replacement brake parts.

6-34

Battery

Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free

ACDelco battery. When it’s time for a new battery,

get one that has the replacement number shown on the

original battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco

battery. See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the

Index for battery location.

WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related

accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals

known to the State of California to cause cancer and

reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle Storage

If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or

more, remove the black, negative (-) cable from the

battery. This will help keep your battery from

running down.

CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas

that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you

aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” in the Index

for tips on working around a battery without

getting hurt.

Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle

for longer storage periods.

Also, for your audio system, see “Theft-Deterrent

Feature” in the Index.

6-35

Bulb Replacement

Before you replace any bulbs, be sure that all the lamps

are off and the engine isn’t running. See “Replacement

Bulbs” in the Index.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this

section, contact your GM dealer’s service department.

High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting

CAUTION:

The low beam High Intensity Discharge lighting

system operates at a very high voltage. If you try

to service any of the system components, you

could be seriously injured. Have your dealer or

a qualified technician service them.

Halogen Bulbs

CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and

can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or

others could be injured. Be sure to read and

follow the instructions on the bulb package.

6-36

Headlamps

One-Piece Composite Headlamp System

1. Open the hood.

2. Remove the black retainer clips by lifting up.

3. Pull the headlamp assembly out.

4. Unplug the electrical connector.

5. Turn the bulb/socket assembly counterclockwise to

remove it.

6. Put the new bulb/socket assembly into the headlamp

assembly and turn it clockwise until it is tight.

7. Plug in the electrical connector.

8. Put the headlamp assembly back into the vehicle.

9. Install the two retaining clips.

6-37

Two-Piece Composite Headlamp System

1. Open the hood.

2. Remove the black retainer clips by lifting up.

3. Pull the headlamp assembly out.

4. Unplug the electrical connector.

5. Turn the bulb/socket assembly counterclockwise to

remove it.

6. Put the new bulb/socket assembly into the headlamp

assembly and turn it clockwise until it is tight.

7. Plug in the electrical connector.

8. Put the headlamp assembly back into the vehicle.

9. Install the two retaining clips.

6-38

Composite High-Beam Headlamp System (Vehicles

with High Intensity Discharge Lighting Only)

1. Open the hood.

2. Remove the black retainer clips by lifting up.

3. Pull the headlamp assembly out.

4. Unplug the electrical connector.

5. Turn the bulb/socket assembly counterclockwise to

remove it.

6. Put the new bulb/socket assembly into the headlamp

assembly and turn it clockwise until it is tight.

7. Plug in the electrical connector.

8. Put the headlamp assembly back into the vehicle.

9. Install the two retaining clips.

6-39

One-Piece Front Turn Signal

Lamp Assembly

1. Remove the headlamp assembly as shown under

“One-Piece Composite Headlamp System” earlier

in this section.

2. Twist the bulb socket to

remove it from the

headlamp assembly.

3. Pull the bulb straight out to remove it from

the socket.

4. Push the new bulb into the socket until it snaps

into place.

5. Put the bulb socket into the lamp assembly and turn

it clockwise until it is tight.

6. Put the headlamp assembly back into the vehicle.

Install the two retaining clips.

7. Install the two retaining clips.

6-40

Two-Piece Front Turn Signal

Lamp Assembly

1. Remove the headlamp assembly as shown under

“Two-Piece Composite Headlamp System” earlier

in this section.

2. Locate the locking tabs

on the assembly.

Squeeze the tabs

together and push that

end of the assembly out

while holding the tabs.

The assembly will

swing out.

3. Unplug the electrical connector.

4. Turn the harness bulb socket counterclockwise to

remove it.

5. Pull the bulb straight out to remove it from the socket.

6. Push the new bulb into the socket until it snaps into place.

7. Reinstall the harness bulb socket with the new bulb

into the headlamp assembly and turn it clockwise

until it is tight.

8. To reinstall the assembly, snap the outboard end of

the lamp assembly back into the vehicle. Then swing

the assembly in and snap it into place.

9. Install the two retaining clips.

6-41

Taillamps

1. Open the endgate/liftgate.

2. Remove the two screws

from the lamp assembly.

3. Pull the assembly away from the vehicle.

4. Turn the socket counterclockwise to remove it.

Push the tab in while you turn the

socket counterclockwise.

5. Holding the base of the bulb, pull the bulb straight

out of the socket.

6. Push the new bulb straight into the socket until

it clicks.

7. Put the socket into the assembly and turn the socket

clockwise until it locks in place.

8. Install the lamp assembly and tighten the screws.

9. Close the endgate/liftgate.

6-42

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement

Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least

twice a year for wear or cracking. See “Windshield

Wiper Blade Check” in the Index for more information.

See “Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts” in the

Index for the proper type of replacement blade.

NOTICE:

Use care when removing or installing a blade

assembly. Accidental bumping can cause the

arm to fall back and strike the windshield.

1. To remove the old wiper blades, lift the wiper arm

until it locks into a vertical position. A. Blade Assembly

B. Arm Assembly

C. Locking Tab

D. Blade Pivot

E. Hook Slot

F. Arm Hook

2. Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking tab.

Pull down on the blade assembly to release it from

the wiper arm hook.

6-43

3. Remove the insert from the blade assembly. The

insert has two notches at one end that are locked by

the bottom claws of the blade assembly. At the

notched end, pull the insert from the blade assembly.

4. To install the new wiper insert, slide the insert (D),

notched end last, into the end with two blade claws (A).

Slide the insert all the way through the blade claws at the

opposite end (B). The plastic caps (C) will be forced off

as the insert is fully inserted.

5. Be sure that the notches are locked by the bottom

claws. Make sure that all other claws are properly

locked on both sides of the insert slots.

A. Claw in Notch

B. Correct Installation

C. Incorrect Installation

6. Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper arm hook.

Pull up until the pivot locking tab locks in the hook slot.

7. Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assembly

onto the windshield.

6-44

Backglass Wiper Blade Replacement

See “Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement” in this

section for instructions on how to change the backglass

wiper blade. The backglass wiper blade will not lock

in a vertical position like the windshield wiper blade,

so care should be used when pulling it away from

the vehicle.

Tires

Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by

a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions

about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,

see your GM Warranty booklet for details.

CAUTION:

Poorly maintained and improperly used tires

are dangerous.

Overloading your tires can cause overheating

as a result of too much friction. You could

have an air-out and a serious accident.

See “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index.

Underinflated tires pose the same danger

as overloaded tires. The resulting accident

could cause serious injury. Check all tires

frequently to maintain the recommended

pressure. Tire pressure should be checked

when your tires are cold.

Overinflated tires are more likely to

be cut, punctured or broken by a sudden

impact -- such as when you hit a pothole.

Keep tires at the recommended pressure.

Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your

tread is badly worn, or if your tires have

been damaged, replace them.

6-45

Inflation -- Tire Pressure

The Certification/Tire label, which is on the driver’s

door edge, above the door latch, shows the correct

inflation pressures for your tires when they’re cold.

“Cold” means your vehicle has been sitting for at least

three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

NOTICE:

Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation or

overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires

don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can

get the following:

Too much flexing

Too much heat

Tire overloading

Bad wear

Bad handling

Bad fuel economy.

NOTICE: (Continued)

If your tires have too much air (overinflation),

you can get the following:

Unusual wear

Bad handling

Rough ride

Needless damage from road hazards.

When to Check

Check your tires once a month or more. Also, check the

tire pressure of the spare tire.

If you have a compact spare tire, it should be

at 60 psi (420 kPa).

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire

pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated

simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look

properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.

They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.

6-46

Tire Inspection and Rotation

Tires should be rotated every 6,000 to 8,000 miles

(10 000 to 13 000 km). Any time you notice unusual

wear, rotate your tires as soon as possible and check

wheel alignment. Also check for damaged tires or

wheels. See “When It’s Time for New Tires” and

“Wheel Replacement” later in this section for more

information. Make sure the spare tire is stored securely.

Push, pull, and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it

moves, use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable. See

“Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools” in the Index.

The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more uniform

wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation is the most

important. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the

Index for scheduled rotation intervals. When rotating your tires, always use one of the correct

rotation patterns shown here.

If your vehicle has a compact spare tire, don’t include it

in your tire rotation.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and

rear inflation pressures as shown on the Certification/Tire

label. Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly

tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” in the Index.

6-47

CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which

it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose

after a time. The wheel could come off and cause

an accident. When you change a wheel, remove

any rust or dirt from places where the wheel

attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can

use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be

sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if

you need to, to get all the rust or dirt off.

See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index.

When It’s Time for New Tires

One way to tell when it’s

time for new tires is to

check the treadwear

indicators, which will

appear when your tires have

only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or

less of tread remaining.

You need a new tire if any of the following statements

are true:

You can see the indicators at three or more places

around the tire.

You can see cord or fabric showing through the

tire’s rubber.

The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep

enough to show cord or fabric.

The tire has a bump, bulge or split.

The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that

can’t be repaired well because of the size or location

of the damage.

6-48

Buying New Tires

To find out what kind and size of tires you need,

look at the Certification/Tire label.

The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had

a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)

number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,

get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way

your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed

to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating,

traction, ride and other things during normal service on

your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread

design, the TPC number will be followed by an

“MS” (for mud and snow).

If you ever replace your tires with those not having

a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size,

load range, speed rating and construction type

(bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.

CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while

driving. If you mix tires of different sizes or types

(radial and bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not

handle properly, and you could have a crash.

Using tires of different sizes may also cause

damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the same

size and type tires on all wheels.

It’s all right to drive with your compact spare

(if you have one). It was developed for use on

your vehicle.

CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the

wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after

many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel could

fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only radial-ply

tires with the wheels on your vehicle.

6-49

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the

tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum

section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

The following information relates to the system

developed by the United States National Highway

Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by

treadwear, traction and temperature performance.

(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)

The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most

passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading

system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow

tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with

nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),

or to some limited-production tires.

While the tires available on General Motors passenger

cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these

grades, they must also conform to federal safety

requirements and additional General Motors Tire

Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on

the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled

conditions on a specified government test course.

For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and

a half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course

as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires

depends upon the actual conditions of their use,

however, and may depart significantly from the norm

due to variations in driving habits, service practices and

differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction -- AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,

A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to

stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled

conditions on specified government test surfaces of

asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor

traction performance. Warning: The traction grade

assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking

traction tests, and does not include acceleration,

cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

6-50

Temperature -- A, B, C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,

representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of

heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under

controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory

test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the

material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and

excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.

The grade C corresponds to a level of performance

which all passenger car tires must meet under the

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.

Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance

on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required

by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is

established for a tire that is properly inflated and not

overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or

excessive loading, either separately or in combination,

can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance

The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced

carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life

and best overall performance.

Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not

needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or

your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment

may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle

vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels

may need to be rebalanced.

Wheel Replacement

Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted

or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,

wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the

wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum

wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your

dealer if any of these conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.

6-51

Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying

capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the

same way as the one it replaces.

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts

or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original

equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the

right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.

CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts

or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.

It could affect the braking and handling of your

vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you lose

control. You could have a collision in which you or

others could be injured. Always use the correct

wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.

NOTICE:

The wrong wheel can also cause problems with

bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or

odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper

height, vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire

chain clearance to the body and chassis.

See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index for

more information.

Used Replacement Wheels

CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is

dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used or

how far it’s been driven. It could fail suddenly

and cause an accident. If you have to replace a

wheel, use a new GM original equipment wheel.

6-52

Tire Chains

NOTICE:

Don’t use tire chains. They can damage your

vehicle because there’s not enough clearance.

Use another type of traction device only if

its manufacturer recommends it for use on

NOTICE: (Continued)

your vehicle and tire size combination and

road conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s

instructions. To help avoid damage to your

vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the

device if it’s contacting your vehicle, and don’t

spin your wheels.

6-53

Appearance Care

Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some

are toxic. Others can burst into flame if you strike a

match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are

dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space.

When you use anything from a container to clean your

vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s warnings

and instructions. And always open your doors or

windows when you’re cleaning the inside.

Never use these to clean your vehicle:

Gasoline

Benzene

Naphtha

Carbon Tetrachloride

Acetone

Paint Thinner

Turpentine

Lacquer Thinner

Nail Polish Remover

They can all be hazardous -- some more than

others -- and they can all damage your vehicle, too.

Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can.

In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:

Alcohol

Laundry Soap

Bleach

Reducing Agents

Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle

Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose

dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted surfaces

with a clean, damp cloth.

Cleaning of Fabric/Carpet

Your dealer has two cleaners, Multi-Purpose Interior

Cleaner and Capture Non-Solvent Dry Spot and Soil

Remover for cleaning fabric and carpet. They will clean

normal spots and stains very well. You can get

GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer.

See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.

6-54

Here are some cleaning tips:

Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.

Clean up stains as soon as you can -- before they set.

Carefully scrape off any excess stain.

Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean area

often. A soft brush may be used if stains are stubborn.

If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, clean the

entire area immediately or it will set.

Using Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner

on Fabric

1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt.

2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section.

Mask surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.

3. Mix powdered cleaner following the directions on

the container label to form thick suds.

4. Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge.

Don’t saturate the material and don’t rub it roughly.

5. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a sponge

to remove the suds.

6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, damp towel or cloth.

7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.

Special Fabric Cleaning Problems

Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black),

egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine and

blood can be removed as follows:

1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the

soiled area with cool water.

2. If a stain remains, follow the Multi-Purpose

Interior Cleaner instructions described earlier.

3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine,

treat the area with a water/baking soda solution:

1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml)

of lukewarm water.

4. Let dry.

Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili

sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:

1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.

2. First, clean with cool water and allow to

dry completely.

3. If a stain remains, follow instructions for

Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner.

6-55

Cleaning Vinyl

Use warm water and a clean cloth.

Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt.

You may have to do it more than once.

Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain

if you don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth

and a vinyl/leather cleaner. See your dealer for

this product.

Cleaning Leather

Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or

saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let the

leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.

For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner. See your

dealer for this product.

Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive

cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.

Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned

immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the

finish, it can harm the leather.

Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel

Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces

of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or

waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield

and even make it difficult to see through the windshield

under certain conditions.

Cleaning Interior Plastic Components

Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth

or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the

surface finish.

Cleaning Wood Panels

Use a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water

(use mild dish washing soap). Dry the wood

immediately with a clean cloth.

6-56

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it

may severely weaken them. In a crash, they

might not be able to provide adequate protection.

Clean safety belts only with mild soap and

lukewarm water.

Cleaning Glass Surfaces

Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or

a liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal

tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass.

See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.

Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they may

cause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear

window, since they may have to be scraped off later.

If abrasive cleaners are used on the inside of the rear

window, an electric defogger element may be damaged.

Any temporary license should not be attached across the

defogger grid.

6-57

Cleaning the Outside of the Windshield,

Backglass and Wiper Blades

If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield

washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running, wax,

sap or other material may be on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with GM Windshield

Cleaner, Bon Ami Powder (non-scratching glass

cleaning powder), GM Part No. 1050011. The windshield

is clean if beads do not form when you rinse it with water.

Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades

and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping

vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength windshield

washer solvent. Then rinse the blade with water.

Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;

replace blades that look worn.

Weatherstrips

Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last

longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply silicone

grease with a clean cloth at least every six months. During

very cold, damp weather more frequent application may be

required. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in

the Index.

Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle

The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth

of color, gloss retention and durability.

Washing Your Vehicle

The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep it

clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.

Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.

Use a car washing soap. Don’t use strong soaps or

chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,

removing all soap residue completely. You can get

GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer.

See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.

Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,

or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents

should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on

the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a

soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid

surface scratches and water spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water to enter

your vehicle.

6-58

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses

Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car

washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.

Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.”

Finish Care

Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by

hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint

finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products

from your dealer. See “Appearance Care and Materials”

in the Index.

Your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish.

The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored

basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are

non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat

paint finish.

NOTICE:

Machine compounding or aggressive polishing

on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may dull the

finish or leave swirl marks.

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other

salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird

droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,

can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on

painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.

If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked

safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather

and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period

of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking

new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered

whenever possible.

6-59

Cleaning Aluminum Wheels

(If Equipped)

Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with

mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After

rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax

may then be applied.

The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted

surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps,

chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners, cleaners

with acid or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because

you could damage the surface. Do not use chrome polish

on aluminum wheels.

Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash

that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes. These

brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.

Cleaning Tires

To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner.

NOTICE:

When applying a tire dressing always take care to

wipe off any overspray or splash from all painted

surfaces on the body or wheels of the vehicle.

Petroleum-based products may damage the paint

finish and tires.

Sheet Metal Damage

If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal

repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop

applies anti-corrosion material to the parts repaired or

replaced to restore corrosion protection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide

the corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.

6-60

Finish Damage

Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish

should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode

quickly and may develop into a major repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up

materials available from your dealer or other service

outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected

in your dealer’s body and paint shop.

Underbody Maintenance

Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control

can collect on the underbody. If these are not removed,

accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on the underbody

parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust

system even though they have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush these materials from the

underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud

and other debris can collect. Dirt packed in closed areas

of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.

Your dealer or an underbody car washing system

can do this for you.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create

a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon

and attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This

damage can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped

discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched

into the paint surface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will

repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new

vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within

12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,

whichever occurs first.

6-61

GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials

PART NUMBER SIZE DESCRIPTION USAGE

994954 23 in. x 25 in. Polishing Cloth – Wax Treated Exterior polishing cloth

1050172 16 oz. (0.473 L) Tar and Road Oil Remover Removes tar, road oil and asphalt

1050173 16 oz. (0.473 L) Chrome Cleaner and Polish Use on chrome, stainless steel, nickel, copper and brass

1050174 16 oz. (0.473 L) White Sidewall Tire Cleaner Removes soil and black marks from whitewalls

1050214 32 oz. (0.946 L) Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl tops, upholstery and convertible tops

1050427 23 oz. (0.680 L) Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime, smoke and fingerprints

1052918** 8 oz. (0.237 L) Armor All Protectant Protects leather, wood, acrylics, Plexiglas , plastic,

rubber and vinyl

1052925 16 oz. (0.473 L) Multi-Purpose

Interior Cleaner Cleans carpets, seats, interior trim, door panels

and floor mats

1052929 16 oz. (0.473 L) Wheel Cleaner Spray on and rinse with water

1052930 8 oz. (0.237 L) Capture Dry Spot Remover Attracts, absorbs and removes soils on fabric

12345721 2.5 sq. ft. Synthetic Chamois Shines vehicle without scratching

12345725 12 oz. (0.354 L) Silicone Tire Shine Spray on tire shine

12377964* 16 oz. (0.473 L) Finish Enhancer Removes dust, fingerprints and surface contaminants

12377966* 16 oz. (0.473 L) Cleaner Wax Removes light scratches and oxidation and protects finish

12377984* 16 oz. (0.473 L) Surface Cleaner Removes contaminants, blemishes and swirl marks

See your General Motors Parts Department for these products. * For exterior use only.

See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. **Not recommended for use on instrument panels.

6-62

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears

on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel,

on the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through

the windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also

appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts

labels and the certificates of title and registration.

Engine Identification

The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This

code will help you identify your engine, specifications

and replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification Label

You’ll find this label on the inside of the glove box.

It’s very helpful if you ever need to order parts.

On this label is:

your VIN,

the model designation,

paint information and

a list of all production options and

special equipment.

Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.

6-63

Electrical System

Add-On Electrical Equipment

NOTICE:

Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle unless

you check with your dealer first. Some electrical

equipment can damage your vehicle and the

damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.

Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other

components from working as they should.

Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to

add anything electrical to your vehicle, see “Servicing

Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.

Headlamps

The headlamp wiring is protected by an internal circuit

breaker. An electrical overload will cause the lamps to go

on and off, or in some cases to remain off. If this happens,

have your headlamp wiring checked right away.

Windshield Wipers

The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit breaker

and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy snow or ice,

the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If the overload is

caused by some electrical problem, be sure to get it fixed.

Power Windows and Other Power Options

Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other

power accessories. When the current load is too heavy,

the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the

circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away.

Fuses and Circuit Breakers

The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from

short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit

breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused

by electrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the band

is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you replace

a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating.

If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have

a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same

amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle that

you can get along without -- like the radio or cigarette

lighter -- and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.

Replace it as soon as you can.

6-64

Instrument Panel Fuse Block

The instrument panel fuse

block is located at the

driver’s end of the

instrument panel.

Remove the cover by turning the fastener

counterclockwise. Extra fuses and the fuse extractor are

provided in the cover. To reinstall the fuse panel cover,

push in and turn the fastener clockwise. Fuse/Circuit

Breaker Usage

A Not Used

B Not Used

1 Not Used

2 Cigarette Lighter,

Data Link Connector

6-65

Fuse/Circuit

Breaker Usage

3 Cruise Control Module and

Switch, Body Control Module,

Heated Seats

4 Gages, Body Control Module,

Instrument Panel Cluster

5 Parking Lamps, Power Window

Switch, Body Control Module,

Ashtray Lamp

6 Steering Wheel Radio Controls

7 Headlamps Switch, Body Control

Module, Headlamp Relay

8 Courtesy Lamps, Battery

Run-Down Protection

9 HVAC Control Head (Manual)

10 Turn Signal

11 Cluster, Engine Control Module

12 Interior Lights

Fuse/Circuit

Breaker Usage

13 Auxiliary Power

14 Power Locks Motor

15 4WD Switch, Engine Controls

(VCM, PCM, Transmission)

16 Supplemental Inflatable Restraint

17 Front Wiper

18 Steering Wheel Radio Controls

19 Radio, Battery

20 Amplifier

21 HVAC (Manual),

HVAC I (Automatic),

HVAC Sensors (Automatic)

22 Anti-Lock Brakes

23 Rear Wiper

24 Radio, Ignition

6-66

Engine Compartment Fuse Block The fuse block is located under the hood at the

driver’s side of the engine compartment. See “Engine

Compartment Overview” in the Index for more

information on location. Before using this fuse block

picture and chart, check to see that it matches the fuse

block in your vehicle. If the fuse block pictured here is

different than your vehicle’s, use the fuse block picture

and chart located later in this section.

Remove the cover by turning the fastener

counterclockwise. To reinstall the fuse panel cover,

push in and turn the fastener clockwise.

6-67

Name Usage

TRL TRN Trailer Left Turn

TRR TRN Trailer Right Turn

TRL B/U Trailer Back Up Lamps

VEH B/U Vehicle Back Up Lamps

RT TURN Right Turn Signal Front

LT TURN Left Turn Signal Front

HDLP W/W Not Used

Name Usage

LT TRN Left Turn Signal Rear

RT TRN Right Turn Signal Rear

RR PRK Right Rear Parking Lamps

TRL PRK Trailer Park Lamps

LTHDLP Left Headlamp

RTHDLP Right Headlamp

FRPRK Front Parking Lamps

INT BAT I/P Fuse Block Feed

ENG I Engine Sensors/Solenoids, MAF,

CAM, PURGE, VENT

ECM B Engine Control Module, Fuel

Pump Module, Oil Pressure

ABS Anti-Lock Brake System

ECM I Engine Control Module Injectors

A/C Air Conditioning

W/W PMP Not Used

HORN Horn

BTSI Automatic Transmission Shift

Lock Control System

B/U LP Back Up Lamps

IGN B Column Feed, IGN 2, 3, 4

RAP Retained Accessory Power

6-68

Name Usage

LD LEV Not Used

OXYSEN Oxygen Sensor

IGN E Engine

MIR/LKS Mirrors, Door Locks

FOG LP Fog Lamps

IGN A Starting and Charging IGN 1

STUD #2 Accessory Feeds, Electric Brake

PARKLP Parking Lamps

LR PRK Left Rear Parking Lamps

IGN C Starter Solenoid,

Fuel Pump, PRNDL

HTDSEAT Heated Seat

HVAC HVAC System

Name Usage

TRCHMSL Trailer Center High Mount

Stop Light

RRDFOG Rear Defogger

TBC Truck Body Computer

CRANK Clutch Switch, NSBU Switch

HAZLP Hazard Lamps

VECHMSL Vehicle Center High-Mounted

Stop Lamp

HTDMIR Heated Mirror

ATC Transfer Case (Four-Wheel Drive)

STOPLP Stop Lamps

RR W/W Rear Window Wiper

6-69

Engine Compartment Fuse Block

(Vehicles with HID Headlamps)

The fuse block is located under the hood at the driver’s

side of the engine compartment. See “Engine

Compartment Overview” in the Index for more

information on location. Before using this fuse block

picture and chart, check to see that it matches the fuse

block in your vehicle. If the fuse block pictured here is

different than your vehicle’s, use the fuse block picture

and chart located earlier in this section.

Remove the cover by turning the fastener

counterclockwise. To reinstall the fuse panel cover,

push in and turn the fastener clockwise.

6-70

Name Usage

TRL TRN Trailer Left Turn

TRR TRN Trailer Right Turn

TRL B/U Trailer Back-Up Lamps

VEH B/U Vehicle Back-Up Lamps

RT TURN Right Turn Signal Front

LT TURN Left Turn Signal Front

LT TRN Left Turn Signal Rear

Name Usage

RT TRN Right Turn Signal Rear

RR PRK Right Rear Parking Lamps

TRL PRK Trailer ParkingLamps

LT LOW Low-Beam Headlamp, Left

RT LOW Low-Beam Headlamp, Right

FRPRK Front Parking Lamps

INT BAT I/P Fuse Block Feed

ENG I Engine Sensors/Solenoids, MAF,

CAM, PURGE, VENT

ECM B Engine Control Module, Fuel

Pump, Module, Oil Pressure

ABS Anti-Lock Brake System

ECM I Engine Control Module Injectors

A/C Air Conditioning

LT HI High-Beam Headlamp, Left

RT HI High-Beam Headlamp, Right

HORN Horn

BTSI Automatic Transmission Shift

Lock Control System

B/U LP Back-Up Lamps

DRL Daytime Running Lamps

IGN B Column Feed, IGN 2, 3, 4

6-71

Name Usage

RAP Retained Accessory Power

LDLEV Electronic Load Leveling

OXYSEN Oxygen Sensor

IGN E Engine

MIR/LKS Mirrors, Door Locks

FOG LP Fog Lamps

IGN A Starting and Charging, IGN 1

STUD #2 Accessory Feeds, Electric Brake

PARKLP Parking Lamps

LR PRK Left Rear Parking Lamps

IGN C Starter Solenoid, Fuel Pump,

PRNDL

HTDSEAT Heated Seats

HVAC HVAC System

Name Usage

TRCHMSL Trailer Center High-Mounted

Stop Lamp

HI BEAM High-Beam Headlamps

RRDFOG Rear Defogger

TBC Truck Body Computer

CRANK Clutch Switch, NSBU Switch

HAZLP Hazard Lamps

VECHMSL Vehicle Center

High-Mounted Stoplamp

HTDMIR Heated Mirror

ATC Automatic Transfer Case

STOPLP Stoplamps

RR W/W Rear Window Wiper

6-72

Replacement Bulbs

Lamps Quantity Number

Halogen Headlamps,

Composite Low Beam 2 9006 HB4 or

9006LL

Halogen Headlamps,

Composite High Beam 2 9005 HB3

Tail and Stop Lamps 4 3057

Front

Sidemarker Lamps 2 194 NA

Turn Signal Lamps 2 3457A

Capacities and Specifications

Engine Description “VORTEC” 4300. . . . . . . . . . . .

Type V6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VIN Code W. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Firing Order 1-6-5-4-3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Horsepower 190 at 4,400 rpm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Thermostat Specification 195 F (91 C). . . . . . . . . . .

Spark Plug Gap 0.060 inches (1.52 mm). . . . . . . . . .

Wheels and Tires

Wheel Nut Torque 100 lb-ft (140 N·m). . . . . . . . . . .

Tire Pressure See the Certification/Tire label.. . . . . .

See “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index.

6-73

Capacities

Please refer to “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”

in the Index for more information.

Cooling System*

Automatic Trans. 11.7 quarts (11.1 L). . . . . . . . . . . .

Manual Trans. 11.9 quarts (11.3 L). . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Crankcase* 4.5 quarts (4.3 L). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automatic Transmission

(Drain and Refill)* 5.0 quarts (4.7 L). . . . . . . . .

Differential Fluid

Rear 4.0 pints (1.9 L). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front 2.6 pints (1.2 L). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuel Tank

(2-Door Models) 19.0 U.S. gallons (72.0 L). . . .

Fuel Tank

(4-Door Models) 18.0 U.S. gallons (68.0 L). . . .

A/C Refrigerant See refrigerant charge label. . . . . . under the hood.

*All capacities are approximate. After refill, the level

must be checked.

Normal Maintenance

Replacement Parts

Replacement part numbers listed in this section are

based on the latest information available at the time of

printing, and are subject to change. If a part listed in this

manual is not the same as the part used in your vehicle

when it was built, or if you have any questions, please

contact your GM dealer.

Thermostat** 12559051. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Oil Filter* (2-Wheel Drive) PF47 (PF52 Optional). . .

Oil Filter* (4-Wheel Drive) PF52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Air Cleaner Filter* A1163C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PCV Valve* CV769C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automatic Transmission Filter Kit** 24200796. . . .

Spark Plugs* 41-932. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuel Filter* GF481. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front Windshield

Wiper Blade Trico 20 inches (50.8 cm). . . . . . . . . .

Backglass Wiper Blade Trico 14 inches (35.6 cm). . .

*ACDelco Part No.

**GM Part No.

6-74

Vehicle Dimensions*

Wheelbase

2-Door 100.5 inches (255.3 cm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-Door 107.0 inches (271.8 cm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Length

2WD 2-Door 175.0 inches (444.5 cm). . . . . . . . . . .

2WD 4-Door 175.4 inches (445.5 cm). . . . . . . . . . .

4-Door 181.1 inches (460.0 cm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Height

2WD 2-Door 66.0 inches (167.6 cm). . . . . . . . . . . .

4WD 2-Door 66.9 inches (170.0 cm). . . . . . . . . . . .

2WD 4-Door 65.9 inches (167.4 cm). . . . . . . . . . . .

4WD 4-Door 67.0 inches (170.2 cm). . . . . . . . . . . .

Width 67.8 inches (172.2 cm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front Tread

2WD 55.0 inches (139.6 cm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4WD 57.3 inches (145.4 cm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear Tread

2WD 54.7 inches (138.8 cm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4WD 55.1 inches (139.9 cm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

*Figures reflect base equipment only.

7- 7-1

Section 7 Maintenance Schedule

This section covers the maintenance required for your vehicle. Your vehicle needs these services to retain its safety,

dependability and emission control performance.

7-2 Introduction

7-4 Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services

7-8 Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance

7-30 Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance

7-42 Part B: Owner Checks and Services

7-47 Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections

7-49 Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

7-52 Part E: Maintenance Record

7-2

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan

supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your

Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer

for details.

Introduction

Your Vehicle and the Environment

Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your

vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the

environment. All recommended maintenance procedures

are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even

affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid

levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level

of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our

environment, and to keep your vehicle in good

condition, please maintain your vehicle properly.

Maintenance Requirements

Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections and

recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in

this manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good

working condition. Any damage caused by failure to

follow recommended maintenance may not be covered

by warranty.

7-3

How This Section is Organized

This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts:

“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” shows

what to have done and how often. Some of these

services can be complex, so unless you are technically

qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should

let your dealer’s service department or another qualified

service center do these jobs.

CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can

be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can

be seriously injured. Do your own maintenance

work only if you have the required know-how

and the proper tools and equipment for the job.

If you have any doubt, have a qualified

technician do the work.

If you want to get the service information, see “Service

and Owner Publications” in the Index.

“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you

what should be checked and when. It also explains

what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in

good condition.

“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explains

important inspections that your dealer’s service

department or another qualified service center

should perform.

“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” lists

some recommended products necessary to help keep

your vehicle properly maintained. These products, or

their equivalents, should be used whether you do the

work yourself or have it done.

“Part E: Maintenance Record” is a place for you

to record and keep track of the maintenance performed

on your vehicle. Keep your maintenance receipts.

They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for

warranty repairs.

7-4

Part A: Scheduled

Maintenance Services

Using Your Maintenance Schedule

We at General Motors want to help you keep your

vehicle in good working condition. But we don’t know

exactly how you’ll drive it. You may drive very short

distances only a few times a week. Or you may drive

long distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather.

You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.

Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in

many other ways.

Because of all the different ways people use their

vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more

frequent checks and replacements. So please read the

following and note how you drive. If you have any

questions on how to keep your vehicle in good

condition, see your dealer.

This part tells you the maintenance services you

should have done and when you should schedule them.

If you go to your dealer for your service needs, you’ll

know that GM-trained and supported service people

will perform the work using genuine GM parts.

The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in

Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses

these. All parts should be replaced and all necessary

repairs done before you or anyone else drives

the vehicle.

These schedules are for vehicles that:

carry passengers and cargo within recommended

limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s

Certification/Tire label. See “Loading Your Vehicle”

in the Index.

are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal

driving limits.

are driven off-road in the recommended manner. See

“Off-Road Driving With Your Four-Wheel-Drive

Vehicle” in the Index.

use the recommended fuel. See “Fuel” in the Index.

Selecting the Right Schedule

First you’ll need to decide which of the two schedules

is right for your vehicle. Here’s how to decide which

schedule to follow:

Scheduled Maintenance

7-5

Short Trip/City Definition

Follow the Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance if

any one of these conditions is true for your vehicle:

Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km).

This is particularly important when outside

temperatures are below freezing.

Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent

driving in stop-and-go traffic).

You operate your vehicle in dusty areas or

off-road frequently.

You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top

of your vehicle.

If the vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi

or other commercial application.

One of the reasons you should follow this schedule if

you operate your vehicle under any of these conditions

is that these conditions cause engine oil to break

down sooner.

Short Trip/City Intervals

Every 3,000 Miles (5 000 km): Engine Oil and

Filter Change (or 3 months, whichever occurs first).

Chassis Lubrication (or 3 months, whichever occurs

first). Drive Axle Service (or 3 months, whichever

occurs first).

Every 6,000 Miles (10 000 km): Tire Rotation.

Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Engine Air

Cleaner Filter Inspection, if driving in dusty

conditions. Automatic Transmission Service

(severe conditions only).

Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Engine Air

Cleaner Filter Replacement. Fuel Filter Replacement.

Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic

Transmission Service (normal conditions).

Automatic Transfer Case Only: Transfer Case

Fluid Change.

(Continued)

Scheduled Maintenance

7-6

Short Trip/City Intervals

Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine Accessory

Drive Belt Inspection.

Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Spark Plug Wire

Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement. Positive

Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Inspection.

Every 150,000 Miles (240 000 km): Cooling System

Service (or every 60 months, whichever occurs first).

These intervals only summarize maintenance services.

Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance

on the following pages.

Long Trip/Highway Definition

Follow this scheduled maintenance only if none of

the conditions from the Short Trip/City Scheduled

Maintenance are true. Do not use this schedule if the

vehicle is used for trailer towing, driven in a dusty area

or used off paved roads. Use the Short Trip/City

schedule for these conditions.

Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under

highway conditions causes engine oil to break

down slower.

Scheduled Maintenance

7-7

Long Trip/Highway Intervals

Every 7,500 Miles (12 500 km): Engine Oil and Filter

Change (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).

Chassis Lubrication (or every 12 months, whichever

occurs first). Drive Axle Service. Tire Rotation.

Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Automatic

Transmission Service (severe conditions only).

Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Fuel Filter

Replacement. Engine Air Cleaner Filter Replacement.

Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic

Transmission Service (normal conditions).

Automatic Transfer Case Only: Transfer Case

Fluid Change.

Long Trip/Highway Intervals

Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine Accessory

Drive Belt Inspection.

Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Spark Plug Wire

Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement. Positive

Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Inspection.

Every 150,000 Miles (240 000 km): Cooling System

Service (or every 60 months, whichever occurs first).

These intervals only summarize maintenance services.

Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance

on the following pages.

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance

7-8

The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles

(166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles

(166 000 km) at the same intervals. The services shown

at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be performed at

the same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km).

See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic

Maintenance Inspections” following.

Footnotes

The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the

California Air Resources Board has determined that

the failure to perform this maintenance item will not

nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability

prior to the completion of the vehicle’s useful life.

We, however, urge that all recommended maintenance

services be performed at the indicated intervals and

the maintenance be recorded.

# Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering

linkage, parking brake cable guides, propshaft splines,

universal joints and brake pedal springs.

+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire

rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under

“Periodic Maintenance Inspections” in Part C of

this schedule.

** Drive axle service. See “Recommended Fluids and

Lubricants” in the Index for proper lubricant to use:

Check fluid level and add fluid as needed. If driving

in dusty areas or when towing a trailer, drain fluid

and refill every 15,000 miles (25 000 km).

If your vehicle has a locking differential,

drain fluid and refill at first engine oil change.

More frequent lubrication may be required for

heavy-duty or off-road use.

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance

7-9

3,000 Miles (5 000 km)

Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

An Emission Control Service.

Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

(See footnote #.)

Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

6,000 Miles (10 000 km)

Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

An Emission Control Service.

Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

(See footnote #.)

Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance

7-10

9,000 Miles (15 000 km)

Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

An Emission Control Service.

Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

(See footnote #.)

Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

12,000 Miles (20 000 km)

Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

An Emission Control Service.

Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

(See footnote #.)

Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance

7-11

15,000 Miles (25 000 km)

Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

An Emission Control Service.

Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

(See footnote #.)

Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions.

Replace filter if necessary.

An Emission Control Service. (See footnote .)

Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven

under one or more of these conditions:

– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches

90 F (32 C) or higher.

– In hilly or mountainous terrain.

– When doing frequent trailer towing.

– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the

fluid and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance

7-12

18,000 Miles (30 000 km)

Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

An Emission Control Service.

Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

(See footnote #.)

Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

21,000 Miles (35 000 km)

Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

An Emission Control Service.

Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

(See footnote #.)

Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance

7-13

24,000 Miles (40 000 km)

Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

An Emission Control Service.

Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

(See footnote #.)

Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

27,000 Miles (45 000 km)

Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

An Emission Control Service.

Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

(See footnote #.)

Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance

7-14

30,000 Miles (50 000 km)

Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

An Emission Control Service.

Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

(See footnote #.)

Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

Replace fuel filter.

An Emission Control Service. (See footnote .)

Replace engine air cleaner filter.

An Emission Control Service.

Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven

under one or more of these conditions:

– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches

90 F (32 C) or higher.

– In hilly or mountainous terrain.

– When doing frequent trailer towing.

– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the

fluid and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).

Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance

7-15

33,000 Miles (55 000 km)

Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

An Emission Control Service.

Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

(See footnote #.)

Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

36,000 Miles (60 000 km)

Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

An Emission Control Service.

Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

(See footnote #.)

Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance

7-16

39,000 Miles (65 000 km)

Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

An Emission Control Service.

Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

(See footnote #.)

Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

42,000 Miles (70 000 km)

Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

An Emission Control Service.

Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

(See footnote #.)

Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance

7-17

45,000 Miles (75 000 km)

Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

An Emission Control Service.

Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

(See footnote #.)

Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven

under one or more of these conditions:

– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches

90 F (32 C) or higher.

– In hilly or mountainous terrain.

– When doing frequent trailer towing.

– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the

fluid and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).

Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions.

Replace filter if necessary.

An Emission Control Service. (See footnote .)

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance

7-18

48,000 Miles (80 000 km)

Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

An Emission Control Service.

Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

(See footnote #.)

Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

50,000 Miles (83 000 km)

If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed

previously and, therefore, haven’t changed your automatic transmission

fluid, change both the fluid and filter. Manual transmission fluid doesn’t

require change.

Automatic Transfer Case Only: Change transfer case fluid.

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance

7-19

51,000 Miles (85 000 km)

Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

An Emission Control Service.

Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

(See footnote #.)

Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

54,000 Miles (90 000 km)

Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

An Emission Control Service.

Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

(See footnote #.)

Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance

7-20

57,000 Miles (95 000 km)

Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

An Emission Control Service.

Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

(See footnote #.)

Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

60,000 Miles (100 000 km)

Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

An Emission Control Service.

Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

(See footnote #.)

Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven

under one or more of these conditions:

– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches

90 F (32 C) or higher.

– In hilly or mountainous terrain.

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance

7-21

– When doing frequent trailer towing.

– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the

fluid and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).

Inspect engine accessory drive belt.

An Emission Control Service.

Replace fuel filter.

An Emission Control Service. (See footnote .)

Replace engine air cleaner filter.

An Emission Control Service.

Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

63,000 Miles (105 000 km)

Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

An Emission Control Service.

Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

(See footnote #.)

Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance

7-22

66,000 Miles (110 000 km)

Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

An Emission Control Service.

Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

(See footnote #.)

Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

69,000 Miles (115 000 km)

Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

An Emission Control Service.

Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

(See footnote #.)

Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance

7-23

72,000 Miles (120 000 km)

Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

An Emission Control Service.

Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

(See footnote #.)

Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

75,000 Miles (125 000 km)

Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

An Emission Control Service.

Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

(See footnote #.)

Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven

under one or more of these conditions:

– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches

90 F (32 C) or higher.

– In hilly or mountainous terrain.

(Continued)

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance

7-24

75,000 Miles (125 000 km) (Continued)

– When doing frequent trailer towing.

– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the

fluid and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).

Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions.

Replace filter if necessary.

An Emission Control Service. (See footnote .)

Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

78,000 Miles (130 000 km)

Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

An Emission Control Service.

Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

(See footnote #.)

Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance

7-25

81,000 Miles (135 000 km)

Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

An Emission Control Service.

Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

(See footnote #.)

Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

84,000 Miles (140 000 km)

Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

An Emission Control Service.

Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

(See footnote #.)

Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance

7-26

87,000 Miles (145 000 km)

Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

An Emission Control Service.

Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

(See footnote #.)

Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

90,000 Miles (150 000 km)

Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

An Emission Control Service.

Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

(See footnote #.)

Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven

under one or more of these conditions:

– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches

90 F (32 C) or higher.

– In hilly or mountainous terrain.

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance

7-27

– When doing frequent trailer towing.

– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the

fluid and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).

Replace fuel filter.

An Emission Control Service. (See footnote .)

Replace engine air cleaner filter.

An Emission Control Service.

Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

93,000 Miles (155 000 km)

Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

An Emission Control Service.

Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

(See footnote #.)

Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance

7-28

96,000 Miles (160 000 km)

Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

An Emission Control Service.

Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

(See footnote #.)

Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

99,000 Miles (165 000 km)

Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

An Emission Control Service.

Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

(See footnote #.)

Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance

7-29

100,000 Miles (166 000 km)

Inspect spark plug wires.

An Emission Control Service.

Replace spark plugs.

An Emission Control Service.

If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed

previously and, therefore, haven’t changed your automatic transmission

fluid, change both the fluid and filter. Manual transmission fluid doesn’t

require change.

Automatic Transfer Case Only: Change transfer case fluid.

Inspect Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) valve.

An Emission Control Service.

150,000 Miles (240 000 km)

Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 60 months since last service,

whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use.

Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test

cooling system and pressure cap.

An Emission Control Service.

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance

7-30

The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles

(166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles

(166 000 km) at the same intervals. The services shown

at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be performed at

the same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km).

See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic

Maintenance Inspections” following.

Footnotes

The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the

California Air Resources Board has determined that

the failure to perform this maintenance item will not

nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability

prior to the completion of the vehicle’s useful life.

We, however, urge that all recommended maintenance

services be performed at the indicated intervals and

the maintenance be recorded.

# Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering

linkage, parking brake cable guides, propshaft splines,

universal joints and brake pedal springs.

+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire

rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under

“Periodic Maintenance Inspections” in Part C of

this schedule.

** Drive axle service. See “Recommended Fluids and

Lubricants” in the Index for proper lubricant to use:

Check fluid level and add fluid as needed.

If your vehicle has a locking differential, drain fluid

and refill at first engine oil change.

Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance

7-31

7,500 Miles (12 500 km)

Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).

An Emission Control Service.

Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).

(See footnote #.)

Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

15,000 Miles (25 000 km)

Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).

An Emission Control Service.

Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).

(See footnote #.)

Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

(Continued)

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance

7-32

15,000 Miles (25 000 km) (Continued)

Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven

under one or more of these conditions:

– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches

90 F (32 C) or higher.

– In hilly or mountainous terrain.

– When doing frequent trailer towing.

– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the

fluid and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).

Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

22,500 Miles (37 500 km)

Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).

An Emission Control Service.

Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).

(See footnote #.)

Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance

7-33

30,000 Miles (50 000 km)

Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).

An Emission Control Service.

Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).

(See footnote #.)

Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven

under one or more of these conditions:

– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches

90 F (32 C) or higher.

– In hilly or mountainous terrain.

– When doing frequent trailer towing.

– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the

fluid and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).

Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

Replace fuel filter.

An Emission Control Service. (See footnote .)

Replace engine air cleaner filter.

An Emission Control Service.

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance

7-34

37,500 Miles (62 500 km)

Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).

An Emission Control Service.

Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).

(See footnote #.)

Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

45,000 Miles (75 000 km)

Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).

An Emission Control Service.

Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).

(See footnote #.)

Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven

under one or more of these conditions:

– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches

90 F (32 C) or higher.

– In hilly or mountainous terrain.

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance

7-35

– When doing frequent trailer towing.

– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the

fluid and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).

Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

50,000 Miles (83 000 km)

If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe conditions listed previously and,

therefore, haven’t changed your automatic transmission fluid, change both the

fluid and filter. Manual transmission fluid doesn’t require change.

Automatic Transfer Case Only: Change transfer case fluid.

52,500 Miles (87 500 km)

Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).

An Emission Control Service.

Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).

(See footnote #.)

Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance

7-36

60,000 Miles (100 000 km)

Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).

An Emission Control Service.

Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).

(See footnote #.)

Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven

under one or more of these conditions:

– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches

90 F (32 C) or higher.

– In hilly or mountainous terrain.

– When doing frequent trailer towing.

– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the

fluid and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).

Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance

7-37

Inspect engine accessory drive belt.

An Emission Control Service.

Replace fuel filter.

An Emission Control Service. (See footnote .)

Replace engine air cleaner filter.

An Emission Control Service.

67,500 Miles (112 500 km)

Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).

An Emission Control Service.

Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).

(See footnote #.)

Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance

7-38

75,000 Miles (125 000 km)

Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).

An Emission Control Service.

Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).

(See footnote #.)

Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven

under one or more of these conditions:

– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches

90 F (32 C) or higher.

– In hilly or mountainous terrain.

– When doing frequent trailer towing.

– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the

fluid and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).

Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance

7-39

82,500 Miles (137 500 km)

Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).

An Emission Control Service.

Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).

(See footnote #.)

Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

90,000 Miles (150 000 km)

Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).

An Emission Control Service.

Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).

(See footnote #.)

Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven

under one or more of these conditions:

– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches

90 F (32 C) or higher.

(Continued)

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance

7-40

90,000 Miles (150 000 km) (Continued)

– In hilly or mountainous terrain.

– When doing frequent trailer towing.

– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the

fluid and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).

Replace fuel filter.

An Emission Control Service. (See footnote .)

Replace engine air cleaner filter.

An Emission Control Service.

Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

97,500 Miles (162 500 km)

Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).

An Emission Control Service.

Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).

(See footnote #.)

Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance

7-41

100,000 Miles (166 000 km)

Inspect spark plug wires.

An Emission Control Service.

Replace spark plugs.

An Emission Control Service.

If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed

previously and, therefore, haven’t changed your automatic transmission

fluid, change both the fluid and filter. Manual transmission fluid doesn’t

require change.

Automatic Transfer Case Only: Change transfer case fluid.

Inspect Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) valve.

An Emission Control Service.

150,000 Miles (240 000 km)

Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 60 months since last service,

whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use.

Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test

the cooling system and pressure cap.

An Emission Control Service.

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

ACTUAL SERVICED BY:

MILEAGE

DATE

7-42

Part B: Owner Checks and Services

Listed in this part are owner checks and services which

should be performed at the intervals specified to help

ensure the safety, dependability and emission control

performance of your vehicle.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.

Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your

vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown

in Part D.

At Each Fuel Fill

It is important for you or a service station attendant

to perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level Check

Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil

if necessary. See “Engine Oil” in the Index for

further details.

Engine Coolant Level Check

Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL

coolant mixture if necessary. See “Engine Coolant” in

the Index for further details.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check

Check the windshield washer fluid level in the

windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if

necessary. See “Windshield Washer Fluid” in the

Index for further details.

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inflation Check

Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures.

Don’t forget to check your spare tire. See “Tires” in

the Index for further details.

Cassette Deck Service

Clean cassette deck. Cleaning should be done every

50 hours of tape play. See “Audio Systems” in the

Index for further details.

7-43

At Least Twice a Year

Restraint System Check

Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your

belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are

working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged

safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might

keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it

repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced.

Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings,

and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system

does not need regular maintenance.)

Wiper Blade Check

Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace blade

inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or

miss areas of the windshield. Also see “Wiper Blades,

Cleaning” in the Index.

Spare Tire Check

At least twice a year, after the monthly inflation check

of the spare tire determines that the spare is inflated to

the correct tire inflation pressure, make sure that the

spare tire is stored securely. Push, pull, and then try to

rotate or turn the tire. If it moves, use the wheel wrench

to tighten the cable. See “Storing the Spare Tire and

Tools” in the Index.

Weatherstrip Lubrication

Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last

longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply

silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,

damp weather more frequent application may be

required. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”

in the Index.

7-44

Manual Transmission Check

Check the transmission fluid level; add if needed.

See “Manual Transmission Fluid” in the Index.

Check for leaks. A fluid leak is the only reason for fluid

loss. Have the system inspected and repaired if needed.

Automatic Transmission Check

Check the transmission fluid level; add if needed.

See “Automatic Transmission Fluid” in the Index.

A fluid loss may indicate a problem. Check the system

and repair if needed.

Hydraulic Clutch System Check

Check the fluid level in the clutch reservoir.

See “Hydraulic Clutch Fluid” in the Index.

A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.

Have the system inspected and repaired at once.

At Least Once a Year

Key Lock Cylinders Service

Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant

specified in Part D.

Body Lubrication Service

Lubricate all hood hinges, hood latch assembly,

secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor, release pawl,

door hinges, fuel door hinge, endgate hinges, outer

tailgate handle pivot points, tailgate hinges, tailgate

mounted spare tire (if equipped), glove box,

console doors, moving seat hardware and folding

seat hardware. Part D tells you what to use.

More frequent lubrication may be required when

exposed to a corrosive environment.

7-45

Starter Switch Check

CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, the vehicle could

move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be

injured. Follow the steps below.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room

around the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular

brake. See “Parking Brake” in the Index if necessary.

NOTE: Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be

ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts.

3. On automatic transmission vehicles, try to start the

engine in each gear. The starter should work only in

PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the starter works

in any other position, your vehicle needs service.

On manual transmission vehicles, put the shift lever

in NEUTRAL (N), push the clutch down halfway

and try to start the engine. The starter should work

only when the clutch is pushed down all the way to

the floor. If the starter works when the clutch isn’t

pushed all the way down, your vehicle needs service.

Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control

System Check

CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, the vehicle could

move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be

injured. Follow the steps below.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room around

the vehicle. It should be parked on a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See “Parking Brake”

in the Index if necessary.

NOTE: Be ready to apply the regular brake

immediately if the vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the key to the RUN position,

but don’t start the engine. Without applying the

regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of

PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever

moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle needs service.

7-46

Ignition Transmission Lock Check

While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn

the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position.

With an automatic transmission, the key should turn

to LOCK only when the shift lever is in PARK (P).

With a manual transmission, the key should turn to

LOCK only when you press the key release button.

On all vehicles, the key should come out only in LOCK.

Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission

PARK (P) Mechanism Check

CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, your vehicle

could begin to move. You or others could be

injured and property could be damaged. Make

sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case

it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular

brake at once should the vehicle begin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing

downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,

set the parking brake.

To check the parking brake’s holding ability:

With the engine running and transmission in

NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure

from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the

vehicle is held by the parking brake only.

To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding

ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).

Then release the parking brake followed by the

regular brake.

Underbody Flushing Service

At least every spring, use plain water to flush any

corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to

clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris

can collect.

7-47

Part C: Periodic

Maintenance Inspections

Listed in this part are inspections and services which

should be performed at least twice a year (for instance,

each spring and fall). You should let your dealer’s

service department or other qualified service center

do these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs are

completed at once.

Proper procedures to perform these services may be

found in a service manual. See “Service and Owner

Publications” in the Index.

Steering, Suspension and Front Drive

Axle Boot and Seal Inspection

Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering

system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of

wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering

lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,

cracks, chafing, etc. Clean and then inspect the

drive axle boot seals for damage, tears or leakage.

Replace seals if necessary.

Exhaust System Inspection

Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body

near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged,

missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams,

holes, loose connections or other conditions which could

cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could let

exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See “Engine Exhaust”

in the Index.

7-48

Engine Cooling System Inspection

Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they

are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,

fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the

outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser.

To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test of the

cooling system and pressure cap is recommended at

least once a year.

Throttle System Inspection

Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding,

and for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as

needed. Replace any components that have high effort

or excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator and

cruise control cables.

Transfer Case and Front Axle

(Four-Wheel Drive) Inspection

Every 12 months or at engine oil change intervals,

check front axle and transfer case and add lubricant

when necessary. A fluid loss could indicate a problem;

check and have it repaired, if needed. Check vent hose

at transfer case for kinks and proper installation. More

frequent lubrication may be required on off-road use.

Brake System Inspection

Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and

hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,

chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and

rotors for surface condition. Inspect other brake parts,

including calipers, parking brake, etc. Check parking

brake adjustment. You may need to have your brakes

inspected more often if your driving habits or conditions

result in frequent braking.

7-49

Part D: Recommended Fluids

and Lubricants

NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,

part number or specification may be obtained from

your dealer.

USAGE FLUID/LUBRICANT

Engine Oil Engine oil with the American

Petroleum Institute Certified

for Gasoline Engines starburst

symbol of the proper viscosity.

To determine the preferred

viscosity for your vehicle’s engine,

see “Engine Oil” in the Index.

Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean,

drinkable water and use only

GM Goodwrench DEX-COOL

or Havoline DEX-COOL

Coolant. See “Engine Coolant”

in the Index.

USAGE FLUID/LUBRICANT

Hydraulic

Brake System Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid

(GM Part No. 12377967 or

equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid).

Windshield

Washer Solvent GM Optikleen Washer Solvent

(GM Part No. 1051515)

or equivalent.

Hydraulic

Clutch System Hydraulic Clutch Fluid

(GM Part No. 12345347 or

equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid).

Parking Brake

Cable Guides Chassis Lubricant (GM Part

No. 12377985 or equivalent) or

lubricant meeting requirements

of NLGI # 2, Category LB

or GC-LB.

Power Steering

System GM Power Steering Fluid

(GM Part No. 1052884 - 1 pint,

1050017 - 1 quart, or equivalent).

7-50

USAGE FLUID/LUBRICANT

Manual

Transmission Synchromesh Transmission Fluid

(GM Part No. 12345349

or equivalent).

Automatic

Transmission DEXRON -III Automatic

Transmission Fluid.

Key Lock

Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant,

Superlube (GM Part

No. 12346241 or equivalent).

Chassis

Lubrication Chassis Lubricant (GM Part

No. 12377985 or equivalent) or

lubricant meeting requirements

of NLGI # 2, Category LB

or GC-LB.

Front and Rear

Axle (Standard

Differential)

SAE 80W-90 Axle Lubricant

(GM Part No. 1052271

or equivalent).

USAGE FLUID/LUBRICANT

Rear Axle

(Locking

Differential)

Axle Lubricant; use only GM

Part No. 1052271. Do not add

friction modifier.

Automatic

Transfer Case AUTO-TRAK II Fluid

(GM Part No. 12378508).

Rear Driveline

Center Spline and

Universal Joints

Chassis Lubricant (GM Part

No. 12377985 or equivalent) or

lubricant meeting requirements

of NLGI # 2, Category LB

or GC-LB.

Constant

Velocity

Universal Joint

Chassis Lubricant (GM Part

No. 12377985 or equivalent) or

lubricant meeting requirements

of NLGI # 2, Category LB

or GC-LB.

7-51

USAGE FLUID/LUBRICANT

Clutch Pushrod

to Clutch

Fork Joint

Chassis Lubricant (GM Part

No. 12377985 or equivalent) or

lubricant meeting requirements

of NLGI # 2, Category LB

or GC-LB.

Hood Latch

Assembly,

Secondary Latch,

Pivots, Spring

Anchor and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol

(GM Part No. 12346293 or

equivalent) or lubricant meeting

requirements of NLGI # 2,

Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood and

Door Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant,

Superlube (GM Part

No. 12346241 or equivalent).

USAGE FLUID/LUBRICANT

Tailgate Mounted

Spare Tire Carrier

(if equipped),

Outer Tailgate

Handle Pivot

Points and Hinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant,

Superlube (GM Part

No. 12346241 or equivalent).

Weatherstrip

Conditioning Dielectric Silicone Grease

(GM Part No. 12345579

or equivalent).

Weatherstrip

Squeaks Synthetic Grease with Teflon,

Superlube (GM Part

No. 12371287 or equivalent).

7-52

Part E: Maintenance Record

After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading and who performed the service in the

boxes provided after the maintenance interval. Any additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or

“Periodic Maintenance” can be added on the following record pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.

Your owner information portfolio is a convenient place to store them.

Maintenance Record

DATE ODOMETER

READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED

7-53

Maintenance Record

DATE ODOMETER

READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED

7-54

Maintenance Record

DATE ODOMETER

READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED

8- 8-1

Section 8 Customer Assistance Information

Here you will find out how to contact Chevrolet if you need assistance. This section also tells you how to obtain

service publications and how to report any safety defects.

8-2 Customer Satisfaction Procedure

8-4 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone

(TTY) Users

8-4 Customer Assistance Offices

8-5 GM Mobility Program for Persons

with Disabilities

8-6 Chevrolet Roadside Assistance Program

8-7 Canadian Roadside Assistance

8-8 Courtesy Transportation

8-9 Warranty Information

8-10 Reporting Safety Defects to the United

States Government

8-10 Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government

8-11 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors

8-2

Customer Satisfaction Procedure Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your

dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns with

the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle

will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service

departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best

intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can

occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your

satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE -- Discuss your concern with a member

of dealership management. Normally, concerns can

be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has

already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts

manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the

general manager.

8-3

STEP TWO -- If after contacting a member of

dealership management, it appears your concern cannot be

resolved by the dealership without further help, contact

the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center by

calling 1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GM of Canada

Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling

1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order

to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have the

following information available to give the Customer

Assistance Representative:

Vehicle Identification Number (This is available

from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate

at the top left of the instrument panel and visible

through the windshield.)

Dealership name and location

Vehicle delivery date and present mileage

When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that

your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.

That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you

have a concern.

STEP THREE -- Both General Motors and your dealer

are committed to making sure you are completely

satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you

continue to remain unsatisfied after following the

procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you should

file with the GM/BBB Auto Line Program to enforce

any additional rights you may have. Canadian owners

refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance

Information booklet for information on the Canadian

Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).

8-4

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program

administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus

to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or

the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Although you may be required to resort to this informal

dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action,

use of the program is free of charge and your case will

generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree

with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and

proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.

You may contact the BBB using the toll-free telephone

number or write them at the following address:

BBB Auto Line

Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.

4200 Wilson Boulevard

Suite 800

Arlington, VA 22203-1804

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

This program is available in all 50 states and the District

of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,

mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the

right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue

its participation in this program.

Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users

To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or

speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),

Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer

Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate

with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438).

(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Customer Assistance Offices

Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free

number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes to write

to Chevrolet, the letter should be addressed to Chevrolet’s

Customer Assistance Center.

United States

Chevrolet Motor Division

Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center

P.O. Box 33170

Detroit, MI 48232-5170

1-800-222-1020

1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))

Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)

8-5

From:

Puerto Rico: 1-800-496-9992 (English)

1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)

U.S. Virgin Islands: 1-800-496-9994

313-381-0022 (Fax Number)

Canada

General Motors of Canada Limited

Customer Communication Centre, 163-005

1908 Colonel Sam Drive

Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

1-800-263-3777 (English)

1-800-263-7854 (French)

1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))

Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

Mexico, Central America and Caribbean

Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico and

U.S. Virgin Islands)

General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.

Customer Assistance Center

Paseo de la Reforma # 2740

Col. Lomas de Bezares

C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.

01-800-508-0000

Long Distance: 011-52 - 53 29 0 800

GM Mobility Program for Persons

with Disabilities

This program, available to

qualified applicants, can

reimburse you up to $1,000

toward aftermarket driver

or passenger adaptive

equipment you may require

for your vehicle (hand

controls, wheelchair/scooter

lifts, etc.).

This program can also provide you with free resource

information, such as area driver assessment centers and

mobility equipment installers. The program is available

for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle

purchase/lease. See your dealer for more details or call

the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.

Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.

GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program.

Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details.

When calling from outside Canada, please dial

1-905-644-3063. All TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.

8-6

Chevrolet Roadside Assistance Program

To enhance Chevrolet’s strong commitment to customer

satisfaction, Chevrolet is excited to announce the

establishment of the Chevrolet Roadside Assistance

Center. As the owner of a 2001 Chevrolet, membership

in Roadside Assistance is free.

Roadside Assistance is available 24 hours a day,

365 days a year, by calling 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872).

This toll-free number will provide you over-the-phone

roadside assistance with minor mechanical problems.

If your problem cannot be resolved over the phone,

our advisors have access to a nationwide network of dealer

recommended service providers. Roadside membership

is free; however some services may incur costs.

Roadside offers two levels of service to the customer,

Basic Care and Courtesy Care:

Toll-free number, 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872),

text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438

Free towing for warranty repairs

Basic over-the-phone technical advice

Available dealer services at reasonable costs

(i.e., wrecker services, locksmith/key service,

glass repair, etc.)

ROADSIDE Courtesy Care PROVIDES:

Roadside Basic Care services (as outlined previously)

Plus:

FREE Non-Warranty Towing (to the closest dealer

from a legal roadway)

FREE Locksmith/Key Service (when keys are lost

on the road or locked inside)

FREE Flat Tire Service (spare installed on the road)

FREE Jump Start (at home or on the road)

FREE Fuel Delivery ($5 of fuel delivered on the road)

8-7

Chevrolet offers Courtesy Transportation for customers

needing warranty service. Courtesy Transportation will

be offered in conjunction with the coverage provided by

the Bumper-to-Bumper New Vehicle Limited Warranty

to eligible purchasers of 2001 Chevrolet passenger cars

and light duty trucks. (Please see your selling dealer

for details.)

Courtesy Care is available to retail and retail lease

customers operating 2001 and newer Chevrolet vehicles

for a period of 3 years/36,000 miles (60 000 km),

whichever occurs first. All Courtesy Care services

must be pre-arranged by Chevrolet Roadside or dealer

service management.

Basic Care and Courtesy Care are not part of or

included in the coverage provided by the New Vehicle

Limited Warranty. Chevrolet reserves the right to

modify or discontinue Basic Care and Courtesy Care

at any time.

The Roadside Assistance Center uses companies

that will provide you with quality and priority service.

When roadside services are required, our advisors will

explain any payment obligations that may be incurred

for utilizing outside services.

For prompt assistance when calling, please have the

following available to give to the advisor:

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

License plate number

Vehicle color

Vehicle location

Telephone number where you can be reached

Vehicle mileage

Description of problem

Canadian Roadside Assistance

Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive

Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere

in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the

separate brochure provided by the dealer or call

1-800-268-6800 for emergency services.

8-8

Courtesy Transportation

Chevrolet has always exemplified quality and value

in its offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your

ownership experience, we and our participating dealers

are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer

support program for new vehicles.

The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to

retail purchase/lease customers in conjunction with

the Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the

New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation

options are available when warranty repairs are

required. This will reduce your inconvenience during

warranty repairs.

Plan Ahead When Possible

When your vehicle requires warranty service, you

should contact your dealer and request an appointment.

By scheduling a service appointment and advising your

service consultant of your transportation needs, your

dealer can help minimize your inconvenience. If your

vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department

immediately, keep driving it until it can be scheduled for

service, unless, of course, the problem is safety-related.

If it is, please call your dealership, let them know this,

and ask for instructions.

If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle

off for service, you are urged to do so as early in the

work day as possible to allow for same day repair.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally be completed while you

wait. However, if you are unable to wait Chevrolet helps

minimize your inconvenience by providing several

transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,

your dealer can offer you one of the following:

Shuttle Service

Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle service

to get you to your destination with minimal interruption of

your daily schedule. This includes a one way shuttle ride to

a destination up to 10 miles from the dealership.

Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement

If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,

reimbursement up to $30 per day (five days maximum)

may be available for the use of public transportation

such as taxi or bus. In addition, should you

arrange transportation through a friend or relative,

reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses up to

$10 per day (five day maximum) may be available.

Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be

supported by original receipts.

8-9

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

When your vehicle is unavailable due to overnight

warranty repairs, your dealer may arrange to provide

you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you

for a rental vehicle you obtained, at actual cost, up to

a maximum of $30.00 per day supported by receipts.

This requires that you sign and complete a rental

agreement and meet state, local and rental vehicle

provider requirements. Requirements vary and may

include minimum age requirements, insurance coverage,

credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage

charges and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,

usage fees, excessive mileage or rental usage beyond the

completion of the repair.

Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as

a courtesy rental.

Additional Program Information

Courtesy Transportation is available during the

Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period,

but it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

A separate booklet entitled “Warranty and Owner

Assistance Information” furnished with each new

vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information.

Courtesy Transportation is available only at

participating dealers and all program options, such as

shuttle service, may not be available at every dealer.

Please contact your dealer for specific information about

availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements

will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.

Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during the

Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General

Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,

alternative transportation may be available under the

Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult your

dealer for details.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,

change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time

and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the

terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion.

Warranty Information

Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet

that contains detailed warranty information.

8-10

REPORTING SAFETY

DEFECTS TO THE UNITED

STATES GOVERNMENT

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could

cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should

immediately inform the National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to

notifying General Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an

investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in

a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy

campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved

in individual problems between you, your dealer or

General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety

Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the

Washington, D.C. area) or write to:

NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation

Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motor

vehicle safety from the hotline.

REPORTING SAFETY

DEFECTS TO THE

CANADIAN GOVERNMENT

If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle

has a safety defect, you should immediately notify

Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General

Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:

Transport Canada

330 Sparks Street

Tower C

Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5

8-11

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

TO GENERAL MOTORS

In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada)

in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify

us. Please call us at 1-800-222-1020, or write:

Chevrolet Motor Division

Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center

P.O. Box 33170

Detroit, MI 48232-5170

In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)

or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:

General Motors of Canada Limited

Customer Communication Centre, 163-005

1908 Colonel Sam Drive

Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

8-12

2001 CHEVROLET SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION

The following publications covering the operation and servicing of your vehicle can be purchased by filling out

the Service Publication Order Form in this book and mailing it in with your check, money order,

or credit card information to Helm, Incorporated (address below.)

CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR 2001 CHEVROLET

SERVICE MANUALS

Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information

on engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes,

electrical, steering, body, etc.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $120.00

TRANSMISSION, TRANSAXLE, TRANSFER CASE

UNIT REPAIR MANUAL

This manual provides information on unit repair service

procedures, adjustments and specifications for the

2001 GM transmissions, transaxles and transfer cases.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00

SERVICE BULLETINS

Service Bulletins give technical service information needed

to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks.

Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the

diagnosis and service of your vehicle.

OWNER’S INFORMATION

Owner publications are written directly for Owners and

intended to provide basic operational information about the

vehicle. The owner’s manual will include the Maintenance

Schedule for all models.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual and

Warranty Booklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $20.00

Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $15.00

CURRENT & PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS

Service Publications are available for current and past

model GM vehicles. To request an order form, please

specify year and model name of the vehicle.

PLEASE COMPLETE THE ORDER FORM SHOWN ON

THE FOLLOWING PAGE AND MAIL TO:

Helm, Incorporated P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207

OR ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123

Monday-Friday 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time

Visit Helm, Inc. on the World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com

For Credit Card Orders Only (VISA–MasterCard–Discover)

8-13

PUBLICATION FORM

NUMBER

Orders will be mailed within 10 days of receipt. Please allow adequate time for postal

service. If further information is needed, write to the address shown below or call

1-800-551-4123. Material cannot be returned for credit without packing slip with return

information within 30 days of delivery. On returns, a re-stocking fee may be applied

against the original order.

ORDER TOLL FREE

(NOTE: For Credit Card Holders Only)

1-800-551-4123

(Monday-Friday 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM EST)

FAX Orders Only 1-313-865-5927

Service Manual

NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name, and also the

name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be sent.

Mail completed order form to:

HELM, INCORPORATED P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207

For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the above address for quotation.

2001 $120.00

2001 $50.00

2001 $20.00

2001 $15.00

TOTAL MATERIAL

Michigan Purchasers

U.S. Order Processing $6.00

Canadian Postage

GRAND TOTAL

add 6% sales tax

GM-CHE-ORD99 *(Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring

obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.) Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents

are to make checks payable in U.S. funds.

(CUSTOMER’S NAME) (ATTENTION)

(STREET ADDRESS—NO P.O. BOX NUMBERS)

(CITY) (ZIP CODE)

DAYTIME TELEPHONE NO.

(STATE)

AREA CODE

( )

PCheck or Money

Order payable to

Helm, Inc. (USA funds

only —

do not send cash.)

VISA

Discover

Account

Number:

Expiration

Date mo/yr:

CUSTOMER SIGNATURE

ITEM DESCRIPTION NAME YEAR

VEHICLE MODEL QTY. PRICE

EACH* TOTAL

PRICE

Owner’s Manual Without Portfolio

Owner’s Manual In Portfolio

Car & Light Truck

Transmission Unit Repair

MasterCard

Check here if your billing address

is different from your shipping

address shown.

PUBLICATION FORM

NUMBER

Chevrolet 2001 Blazer Owners Manual Owner's

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation